2014 Nissan Sentra | Owner's Manual USA
User Manual: 2014-sentra
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 388 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
®
2014 SENTRA
OWNER’S MANUAL
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
Information Provided by:
Owner’s Manual Supplement
The information contained within this supplement revises the following information
in the 2014 Nissan Sentra Owner’s Manual:
●DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM (Canada only) in the “Instruments and
controls” section of the Owner’s Manual.
Read carefully and keep in vehicle
Printing: July 2014 (01)
Publication No. SU14E 3B17U0
Information Provided by:
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
(Canada only)
The headlights automatically illuminate at 100%
intensity (Low beam is used for the Daytime
Running Light System) when the engine is
started and the parking brake is released. The
daytime running lights operate with the headlight
switch in the OFF position. When the daytime
running light system is active, the clearance
lights, front side marker lights, tail lights and rear
side marker lights are also On.
When you turn the headlight switch to
the position for full illumination when driv-
ing at night you will not notice any difference in
the Low Beam.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-
nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
the parking brake is released. The daytime run-
ning lights remain on while the engine is running.
It is necessary at dusk to turn headlight switch
ON for interior controls and switches to illumi-
nate, as those remain OFF while switch is in the
OFF position.
Information Provided by:
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with
confidence. It was produced using the latest
techniques and strict quality control.
This manual was prepared to help you under-
stand the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-
ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this
manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
explains details about the warranties cov-
ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide” explains details
about maintaining and servicing your ve-
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will
explain how to resolve any concerns you
may have with your vehicle, as well as
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon
law.
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle
best. When you require any service or have any
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the
extensive resources available to them.
In addition to factory-installed options, your ve-
hicle may also be equipped with additional ac-
cessories installed by NISSAN or by your
NISSAN dealer prior to delivery. It is important
that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures,
warnings, cautions and instructions concerning
proper use of such accessories prior to operating
the vehicle and/or accessory. See a NISSAN
dealer for details concerning the particular ac-
cessories with which your vehicle is equipped.
Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-
iarity with controls and maintenance require-
ments assisting you in the safe operation of your
vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-
MINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
●NEVER drive under the influence of al-
cohol or drugs.
●ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
●
ALWAYS give your full attention to driving
and avoid using vehicle features or taking
other actions that could distract you.
●
ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-
priate child restraint systems. Preteen
children should be seated in the rear seat.
●ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.
●ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
Information Provided by:
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification could affect its
performance, safety or durability, and
may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or per-
formance problems resulting from modi-
fications may not be covered under
NISSAN warranties.
This manual includes information for all features
and equipment available on this model. Features
and equipment in your vehicle may vary depend-
ing on model, trim level, options selected, order,
date of production, region or availability. There-
fore, you may find information about features or
equipment that are not included or installed on
your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
specifications, performance, design or compo-
nent suppliers without notice and without obliga-
tion. From time to time, NISSAN may update or
revise this manual to provide Owners with the
most accurate information currently available.
Please carefully read and retain with this manual
all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to
ensure you have access to accurate and up-to-
date information regarding your vehicle. Current
versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any
updates can also be found in the Owner section
of the NISSAN website at
https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
navigation/manualsGuide. If you have ques-
tions concerning any information in your Owner’s
Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. See
the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
page in this Owner’s Manual for contact informa-
tion.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the
risk, the procedures must be followed
precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moder-
ate personal injury or damage to your ve-
hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
cedures must be followed carefully.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
Information Provided by:
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-
tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the
vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
call attention to an item in the illustration.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles and cer-
tain products of component wear contain
or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects or other reproductive harm.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-
ies, may contain perchlorate material. The
following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate
Material – special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Visteon and Bosch.
SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio requires
subscription, sold
separately. Not
available in Alaska,
Hawaii or Guam.
For more
information, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
© Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
APD1005
Information Provided by:
NISSAN CARES...
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to
provide NISSAN directly with comments or
questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the
following information:
– Your name, address, and telephone number
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s
side)
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
or via e-mail at:
nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
information.centre@nissancanada.com
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
Information Provided by:
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Instruments and controls
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Starting and driving
In case of emergency
Appearance and care
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Technical and consumer information
Index
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..............0-2
Exterior front ......................................0-3
Exterior rear.......................................0-4
Passenger compartment ...........................0-5
Instrument panel...................................0-6
Engine compartment check locations ................0-7
Warning/indicator lights ............................0-8
Information Provided by:
1. Top tether anchor (P. 1-32)
2. Rear seat belts (P. 1-9)
3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-36)
4. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-2)
5. Front seat belts (P. 1-9)
6. Supplemental front-impact air bags
(P. 1-36)
7. Front seats (P. 1-2)
8. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) (P. 1-44)
9. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-36)
10. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-36)
11. Rear seats (P. 1-4)
12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system (P. 1-20)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LII2057
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
Information Provided by:
1. Engine hood (P. 3-23)
2. Windshield wiper and washer switch,
Windshield (P. 2-24, 8-18)
3. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-42)
4. Power windows (P. 2-39)
5. Door locks, keyfob, keys, NISSAN
Intelligent Key® (if so equipped)
(P. 3-4, 3-7, 3-2, 3-10)
6. Mirrors (P. 3-29)
7. Tire pressure (P. 8-32)
8. Flat tire (P. 6-3)
9. Tire chains (P. 8-39)
10. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
11. Headlight and turn signal switch, LED
headlight accents (P. 2-26)
12. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-26)
13. Tie down hook (if so equipped)
(P. 6-14)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LII2054
EXTERIOR FRONT
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
Information Provided by:
1. Trunk lid (P. 3-24)
2. High mount stop light (P. 8-28)
3. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
4. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-25)
5. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-6)
6. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25), Fuel-filler cap,
fuel recommendation (P. 3-25, P. 9-4)
7. Rearview camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-10)
8. Exterior trunk lid release (P. 3-16),
Interior trunk lid release (if so equipped)
(P. 3-24)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LII2117
EXTERIOR REAR
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
Information Provided by:
1. Interior lights (if so equipped) (P. 2-44)
2. Power window switch, Power door lock
switch (P. 2-39, 3-6)
3. Sun visors (P. 3-28)
4. Moonroof switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-42)
5. Map lights (P. 2-46)
6. Sunglasses holder (P. 2-35)
7. Rearview mirror (P. 3-29)
8. Front cup holders (P. 2-36)
9. Console box (P. 2-37)
10. Rear armrest, cup holders
(P. 1-4, P 2-36)
LII2118
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
Information Provided by:
1. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-26)
2. Steering wheel switch for trip
computer, audio control and
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(if so equipped) (P. 2-7, 4-65)
3. Driver’s supplemental air bag/Horn
(P. 1-44, 2-30)
4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
5. Cruise control main/set switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-24)
6. Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-24)
7. Ventilator (P. 4-16)
8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)
9. Audio system (P. 4-27)
10. Passenger’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-44)
11. Glove box (P. 2-37)
12. Shift lever (P. 5-17)
13. Climate control (P. 4-16, 4-24)
14. Ignition switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-8, 5-10)
15. Telescopic steering (P.3-27)
16. Hood release (P. 3-23)
17. Fuel filler door release (P. 3-25)
18. ECO mode switch (P. 5-22); SPORT
mode switch (P.5-22); Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF switch (P.2-31)
19. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-29);
Power mirror switch (P.3-30); Trunk
release (P.3-24)
* Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LIC2657
INSTRUMENT PANEL
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
Information Provided by:
MRA8DE engine
1. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)
2. Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
reservoir (P. 8-12)
3. Air cleaner (P. 8-17)
4. Battery (P. 8-13)
5. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-21)
6. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)
7. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)
8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)
9. Drive belt location (P. 8-16)
10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-12)
LDI2166
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
Information Provided by:
Warning
light
Name Page
or
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warn-
ing light
2-13
or
Brake warning light 2-13
Charge warning light 2-14
Door open warning
light
2-14
Engine oil pressure
warning light
2-14
Low fuel warning
light
2-14
Warning
light
Name Page
Low tire pressure
warning light
2-14
Low windshield-
washer fluid warning
light
2-16
NISSAN Intelligent
Key® lock warning
light (M/T models) (if
so equipped)
2-16
NISSAN Intelligent
Key® warning light
(if so equipped)
2-16
P position selecting
warning light (CVT
models) (if so
equipped)
2-17
Power steering
warning light
2-16
Warning
light
Name Page
Seat belt warning
light
2-17
Supplemental air
bag warning light
2-17
Indicator
light
Name Page
Continuously Vari-
able Transmission
(CVT) position indi-
cator light (CVT
models)
2-17
Cruise main switch
indicator light (if so
equipped)
2-18
ECO mode indicator
light
2-18
Engine start opera-
tion indicator light (if
so equipped)
2-18
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
Information Provided by:
Indicator
light
Name Page
Front fog light indi-
cator light (if so
equipped)
2-18
Front passenger air
bag status light
2-18
High beam indicator
light (blue)
2-18
Malfunction Indica-
tor Light (MIL)
2-18
Overdrive off indica-
tor light (CVT mod-
els)
2-19
Security indicator
light
2-19
Side light and head-
light indicator light
(green)
2-19
Indicator
light
Name Page
Slip indicator light 2-19
SPORT mode indi-
cator light
2-20
Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
2-20
Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) off
indicator light
2-20
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
Information Provided by:
MEMO
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
Information Provided by:
1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats . ...........................................1-2
Front manual seat adjustment ....................1-2
Folding rear seat ...............................1-4
Head restraints/Headrests.......................1-5
Seat belts ........................................1-9
Precautions on seat belt usage...................1-9
Pregnant women ..............................1-12
Injured persons................................1-12
Three-point type seat belt with retractor..........1-12
Seat belt extenders ............................1-15
Seat belt maintenance .........................1-15
Child safety ......................................1-16
Infants........................................1-17
Small children.................................1-17
Larger children ................................1-17
Child restraints ...................................1-18
Precautions on child restraints ..................1-18
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System .............................1-20
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
LATCH.......................................1-22
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
the seat belts . . ...............................1-24
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH. . . ...............................1-27
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts ............................1-29
Installing top tether strap .......................1-32
Booster seats .................................1-33
Supplemental restraint system .....................1-36
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system .......................................1-36
Supplemental air bag warning labels.............1-51
Supplemental air bag warning light ..............1-51
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
●For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat properly. See “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage” in this section.
●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
●Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
●Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation. The seat may move
suddenly and could cause loss of con-
trol of the vehicle.
●The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort. Seat
belts are most effective when the pas-
senger sits well back and straight up in
the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
being injured is increased.
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
ARS1152
SEATS
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
Forward and backward
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you
slide the seat forward or backward to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat in
position.
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean
back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever
up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” in
this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the shift lever (CVT) is in P (Park) or
the manual shift lever is in N (Neutral) with the
parking brake applied.
Seat lifter (driver’s seat)
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust
the seat height until the desired position is
achieved.
WRS0719 WRS0720 WRS0721
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
Information Provided by:
FOLDING REAR SEAT
Pull the knob 䊊
Ato fold each seatback down.
WARNING
●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seat when it is in the
fold-down position. Use of these areas
by passengers without proper restraints
could result in serious injury in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
●When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched posi-
tion. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
●Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
Center armrest
Pull the armrest down until it rests on the seat
cushion.
LRS2194 LRS2217
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS
WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They may
provide additional protection against in-
jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust-
able head restraints/headrests must be
adjusted properly, as specified in this sec-
tion. Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat. Do not attach anything
to the head restraint/headrest stalks or
remove the head restraint/headrest. Do
not use the seat if the head
restraint/headrest has been removed. If
the head restraint/headrest was removed,
reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position. Failure to fol-
low these instructions can reduce the ef-
fectiveness of the head
restraints/headrests. This may increase
the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision.
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints/headrests.
䉱Indicates the seating position is equipped with
a head restraint.
䡲Indicates the seating position is equipped with
a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped
with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).
●Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be integrated,
adjustable or non-adjustable.
●Adjustable head restraints/headrests have
multiple notches along the stalks to lock
them in a desired adjustment position.
●The non-adjustable head restraints/
headrests have a single locking notch to
secure them to the seat frame.
●Proper Adjustment:
– For the adjustable type, align the head
restraint/headrest so the center of your
ear is approximately level with the center
of the head restraint/headrest.
– If your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the head
restraint/headrest at the highest position.
●If the head restraint/headrest has been re-
moved, ensure that it is reinstalled and
locked in place before riding in that desig-
nated seating position.
LRS2164
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
Information Provided by:
Adjustable head restraint/headrest
components
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Multiple notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
Non-adjustable head restraint/
headrest components
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Single Notch
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
Remove
Use the following procedure to remove the head
restraint/headrest.
1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the
highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from
the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in
a secure place so it is not loose in the
vehicle.
LRS2300 LRS2299 LRS2302
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant uses
the seating position.
Install
1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with
the holes in the seat. Make sure the head
restraint/headrest is facing the correct di-
rection. The stalk with the notch (notches)
䊊
1must be installed in the hole with the lock
knob 䊊
2.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest
before an occupant uses the seating posi-
tion.
Adjust
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center
is level with the center of your ears. If your ear
position is still higher than the recommended
alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at
the highest position.
LRS2303 WRS0134
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
Information Provided by:
For non-adjustable head restraint/
headrest
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-
tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
before riding in that designated seating position.
Raise
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-
tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
before riding in that designated seating position.
Lower
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-
tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
before riding in that designated seating position.
LRS2351 LRS2305 LRS2306
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-
justed and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories specify that seat belts be worn at
all times when a vehicle is being driven.
SSS0136
SEAT BELTS
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat and, if appro-
priate, in a child restraint.
WARNING
●The seat belt should be properly ad-
justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. Serious injury or death can occur if
the seat belt is not worn properly.
SSS0134 SSS0016
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck. The
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
●Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could
increase the risk of internal injuries in
an accident.
●Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
●Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
●Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
●Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
●If the seat belt warning light glows con-
tinuously while the ignition is turned
ON with all doors closed and all seat
belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-
function in the system. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
●No changes should be made to the seat
belt system. For example, do not modify
the seat belt, add material, or install
devices that may change the seat belt
routing or tension. Doing so may affect
the operation of the seat belt system.
Modifying or tampering with the seat
belt system may result in serious per-
sonal injury.
●Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-
vated, it cannot be reused and must be
replaced together with the retractor.
See your NISSAN dealer.
●Removal and installation of preten-
sioner system components should be
done by a NISSAN dealer.
●All seat belt assemblies, including re-
tractors and attaching hardware, should
be inspected after any collision by a
NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recommends
that all seat belt assemblies in use dur-
ing a collision be replaced unless the
collision was minor and the belts show
no damage and continue to operate
properly. Seat belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be
inspected and replaced if either dam-
age or improper operation is noted.
●All child restraints and attaching hard-
ware should be inspected after any col-
lision. Always follow the restraint
manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations.
The child restraints should be replaced
if they are damaged.
SSS0014
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
Information Provided by:
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and
always position the lap belt as low as possible
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder
belt over your shoulder and across your chest.
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-
dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
●Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times.
●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
●For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat belt properly.
●Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
neck with the ALR mode activated, the
child can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt retracts and becomes
tight. This can occur even if the vehicle
is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to
release the child. If the seat belt cannot
be unbuckled or is already unbuckled,
release the child by cutting the seat belt
with a suitable tool (such as a knife or
scissors) to release the seat belt.
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” in this section.
Manual front seat shown
WRS0719
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
䊊
2Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
●The retractor is designed to lock dur-
ing a sudden stop or on impact. A
slow pulling motion permits the seat
belt to move, and allows you some
freedom of movement in the seat.
●If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then
smoothly pull the belt out of the re-
tractor.
䊊
3Position the lap belt portion low and snug
on the hips as shown.
䊊
4Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions three-point seat belts have two modes
of operation:
●Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
●Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow
the driver and passengers some freedom of
movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during
certain impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child
restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-
straints” in this section for more information.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode
should not be activated. If it is activated, it
may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-
sion. It can also change the operation of
the front passenger air bag. See “Supple-
mental air bag warning light” in this sec-
tion.
WRS0137 WRS0138
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
Information Provided by:
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely secured
in the latched position. If they are not
completely secured, passengers may be
injured in an accident or sudden stop.
Unfastening the seat belts
䊊
1To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-
tracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
●When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
●When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows:
●Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
strict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any questions about seat belt opera-
tion, see a NISSAN dealer.
WRS0139
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
Shoulder belt height adjustment (front
seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-
justed to the position best for you. See “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage”in this section. To adjust,
pull out the adjustment button 䊊
1and move the
shoulder belt anchor to the desired position 䊊
2,
so the belt passes over the center of the shoul-
der. The belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release
the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt
anchor into position.
WARNING
●After adjustment, release the adjust-
ment button and try to move the shoul-
der belt anchor up and down to make
sure it is securely fixed in position.
●The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effec-
tiveness of the entire restraint system
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with
the installed seat belts is available that can be
purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in
(200 mm) of length and may be used for either
the driver or front passenger seating position.
See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-
chasing an extender if an extender is required.
WARNING
●Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should
be used with NISSAN seat belts.
●Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use could
result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.
●Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured in a collision or a sud-
den stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
●To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recom-
mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.
●If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
LRS0242
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
Information Provided by:
●Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-
sembly should be replaced.
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the seat
belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt
becomes wrapped around a child’s neck
with the ALR mode activated, the child can
be seriously injured or killed if the seat
belt retracts and becomes tight. This can
occur even if the vehicle is parked. Un-
buckle the seat belt to release the child. If
the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is
already unbuckled, release the child by
cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool
(such as a knife or scissors) to release the
seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
●Rear-facing child restraint
●Forward-facing child restraint
●Booster seat
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less
than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing
child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints
are available for children who outgrow rear-
facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.
Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer
use a forward-facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protec-
tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The lap
belt may not fit over their small hip bones.
In an accident, an improperly fitting seat
belt could cause serious or fatal injury.
Always use appropriate child restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territo-
ries require the use of approved child restraints
for infants and small children. See “Child re-
straints” in this section.
CHILD SAFETY
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by
using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle
seat belt. See “Child restraints” in this section for
more information.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
Studies show that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in
the front seat.
This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-
tem (air bag system) for the front passen-
ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”
in this section.
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-
mends that infants be placed in child restraints
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-
facturer’s instructions for installation and use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at
least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing
child restraint as long as possible up to the height
or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who
outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-
facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old
should be secured in a forward-facing child re-
straint with a harness. Refer to the manufactur-
er’s instructions for minimum and maximum
weight and height recommendations. NISSAN
recommends that small children be placed in
child restraints that comply with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Ve-
hicle Safety Standards. You should choose a
child restraint that fits your vehicle and always
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-
lation and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
restraint with a harness until they reach the maxi-
mum height or weight limit allowed by the child
restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit
of the harness-equipped forward-facing child re-
straint, NISSAN recommends that the child be
placed in a commercially available booster seat to
obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit
properly, the booster seat should raise the child
so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the chest and the top, middle portion of
the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross
the neck or face and should not fall off the shoul-
der. The lap belt should lie snugly across the
lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A
booster seat can only be used in seating posi-
tions that have a three-point type seat belt. The
booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have
a label certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-
tor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has
grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near
the face and neck and the lap belt can be posi-
tioned properly across the lower hips or upper
thighs, use the seat belt without the booster seat.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat
and do not allow a child in the cargo area.
The child could be seriously injured or
killed in a sudden stop or collision.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
Information Provided by:
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS WARNING
●Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– The child restraint must be used and
installed properly. Always follow all
of the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
– Infants and children should never be
held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-
gest adult cannot resist the forces of
a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both a
child and another passenger.
– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. If you
must install a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, see
“Forward-facing child restraint in-
stallation using the seat belts” in this
section.
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front seat.
An inflating air bag could seriously
injure or kill a child. A rear-facing
child restraint must only be used in
the rear seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint
that will fit the child and vehicle.
Some child restraints may not fit
properly in your vehicle.
ARS1098 WRS0256
CHILD RESTRAINTS
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
– Child restraint anchor points are de-
signed to withstand loads from child
restraints that are properly fitted.
– Never use the anchor points for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the front
passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-
sible after fitting the child restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child re-
straint while in the vehicle.
●When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, loose objects can injure occupants
or damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating sur-
face and buckles before placing a child in
the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-
tem. Some child restraints include rigid or
webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-
nected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-
tem” in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
infants and children of various sizes. When se-
lecting any child restraint, keep the following
points in mind:
●Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
●Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
●If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated. Canadian law requires the
top tether strap on forward-facing child re-
straints be secured to the designated an-
chor point on the vehicle.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
Information Provided by:
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible
child restraints. This system may also be referred
to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.
With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle
seat belt to secure the child restraint.
The LATCH anchor points are provided to install
child restraints in the rear outboard seating posi-
tions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint
in the center position using the LATCH anchors.
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-
tions for proper use and installation of
child restraints could result in serious in-
jury or death of a child or other passen-
gers in a sudden stop or collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration.
– Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using the
LATCH lower anchors. The child re-
straint will not be secured properly.
– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-
ing your fingers into the lower anchor
area. Feel to make sure there are no
obstructions over the anchors such
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion
material. The child restraint will not
be secured properly if the lower an-
chors are obstructed.
– Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchor-
age, and a child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.
LATCH system lower anchor locations
WRS0756
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear
of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is
attached to the seatback to help you locate the
LATCH lower anchors.
Installing child restraint LATCH lower
anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to
secure the child restraint. Check your child re-
straint for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the in-
structions provided by the child restraint manu-
facturer.
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint.
LATCH lower anchor location
WRS0700
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
LRS0661
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
LRS0662
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
Information Provided by:
Top tether anchor point locations
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used to at-
tach adult seat belts, or other items or
equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could
damage the child restraint anchorages.
The child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorage,
and a child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision.
The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchor attachments or seat belts. See “In-
stalling top tether strap” in this section.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap child restraint, consult your
NISSAN dealer for details.
Anchor points 䊊
1are located on the rear parcel
shelf.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of the
lower anchors if the combined weight of the child
and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If
the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs, (29.5 kg) use the
vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for in-
stallation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
LRS2195
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors.
3. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
Rear-facing web-mounted – step 2
WRS0801
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
WRS0802
Rear-facing – step 3
LRS0673
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
Information Provided by:
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
straint should not move more than 1 inch
(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it
forward and check to see if the LATCH at-
tachment holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the restraint
in another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint or try
installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if
applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 4.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
Rear-facing – step 4
LRS0674 WRS0256
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the operation
of the front passenger air bag. See
“Supplemental air bag warning light” in
this section.
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear
seats:
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions for belt routing.
Rear-facing – step 1
WRS0256
Rear-facing – step 2
WRS0761
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
Information Provided by:
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
pulling up on the seat belt.
Rear-facing – step 3
LRS2395
Rear-facing – step 4
LRS2396
Rear-facing – step 5
WRS0762
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1
through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this
section. Do not install child restraints that
require the use of a top tether strap in seat-
ing positions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
Rear-facing – step 6
LRS2397
Forward-facing web-mounted – step 2
WRS0799
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
Information Provided by:
3. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child
restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is
removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure
to reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed.
See “Head restraints/headrests” in this sec-
tion for head restraint/headrest adjustment
information.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different
child restraint.
4. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
WRS0800
Forward-facing – step 4
LRS0671
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
straint should not move more than 1 inch
(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it
forward and check to see if the LATCH at-
tachment holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the restraint
in another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint. Not all
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 6.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the operation
of the front passenger air bag. See
“Supplemental air bag warning light” in
this section.
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the
rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and, there-
fore, must not be used in the front seat.
Forward-facing – step 6
WRS0697
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
WRS0699
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
Information Provided by:
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child
restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is
removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure
to reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed.
See “Head restraints/headrests” in this sec-
tion for head restraint/headrest adjustment,
removal and installation information.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different
child restraint.
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions for belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this
section. Do not install child restraints that
require the use of a top tether strap in seat-
ing positions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
Forward-facing – step 3
WRS0680
Forward-facing – step 4
LRS0667
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
Forward-facing – step 5
LRS0668
Forward-facing – step 6
WRS0681
Forward-facing – step 8
WRS0698
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
Information Provided by:
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2
through 8.
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light should illuminate. If this
light is not illuminated, see “Supplemental
air bag warning light” in this section. Move
the child restraint to another seating
position. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-
straint mode) is canceled.
INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used to at-
tach adult seat belts, or other items or
equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could
damage the child restraint anchorages.
The child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorage,
and a child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision.
Forward-facing — step 10
WRS0475 LRS2195
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchors (rear outboard seat positions only)
or the seat belt, as applicable.
1. Flip up the anchor cover 䊊
1from the anchor
point which is located directly behind the
child seat.
2. Position the top tether strap over the top of
the head rest.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point on the rear parcel shelf.
4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint in-
stallation procedure steps in this section
before tightening the tether strap.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
dealer for details.
BOOSTER SEATS
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used
properly, the risk of a child being injured in
a sudden stop or collision greatly
increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the child’s
arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed
in a seating position that has a
lap/shoulder belt.
LRS0455
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
Information Provided by:
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
●Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
●Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
●Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
low back booster seat 䊊
1is chosen, the
vehicle seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
high back booster seat 䊊
2should be used.
●If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place the child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with the
child. Always follow all recommended pro-
cedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.
LRS0453 LRS0464
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
Booster seat installation
CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the
Automatic Locking Retractor mode when
using a booster seat with the seat belts.
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety”, “Child restraints” and “Booster seats”
sections before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rear-
most position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a front-facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions.
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct
booster seat fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint/headrest when the
booster seat is removed. See “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section for head
restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and
installation information.
WRS0699
Front passenger position
LRS0454
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
Information Provided by:
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different
booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-
tions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in “Three-point type seat belt with
retractor” in this section.
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light may or may not illuminate,
depending on the size of the child and the
type of booster seat being used. See
“Supplemental air bag warning light” in this
section.
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-
tion contains important information concerning
the following systems:
●Driver and passenger supplemental front-
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
System)
●Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag
●Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag
●Seat belt with pretensioner
Supplemental front-impact air bag system:
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of
the driver and front passenger in certain frontal
collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the chest area of the
driver and front passenger in certain side impact
collisions. The side air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
WRS0475
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the head of occu-
pants in front and rear outboard seating positions
in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air
bags are designed to inflate on the side where
the vehicle is impacted.
These supplemental restraint systems are de-
signed to supplement the crash protection pro-
vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the occu-
pant seated a suitable distance away from the
steering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-
ers. See “Seat belts” in this section for instruc-
tions and precautions on seat belt usage.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-
onds if the system is operational.
WARNING
●The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact, rear
impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-
tal collision. Always wear your seat
belts to help reduce the risk or severity
of injury in various kinds of accidents.
●The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.
●The seat belts and the front air bags are
most effective when you are sitting well
back and upright in the seat. The front
air bags inflate with great force. Even
with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-
tion in any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from the
front air bag if you are up against it
when it inflates. Always sit back against
the seatback and as far away as practi-
cal from the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel. Always use the seat belts.
WRS0031
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
Information Provided by:
●The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
Advanced Air Bag System monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt us-
age then inflates the air bags as
needed. Failure to properly wear seat
belts can increase the risk or severity of
injury in an accident.
●The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) that turns the front pas-
senger air bag OFF under some condi-
tions. This sensor is only used in this
seat. Failure to be properly seated and
wearing the seat belt can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.
See “Front Passenger air bag and sta-
tus light” in this section.
●Keep hands on the outside of the steer-
ing wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the front
air bag inflates.
ARS1133
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat, if possible.
●Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An in-
flating front air bag could seriously in-
jure or kill your child. See “Child re-
straints” in this section for details.
ARS1044 ARS1045 WRS0256
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact supplemental air bags:
●The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of
a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various kinds
of accidents.
WARNING
●The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective when
you are sitting well back and upright in
the seat with both feet on the floor. The
side air bag and curtain air bag inflate
with great force. Do not allow anyone to
place their hand, leg or face near the
side air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side roof
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window or
lean against the door. Some examples
of dangerous riding positions are
shown in the previous illustrations.
WRS0431 SSS0162
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front seat.
If the side air bag inflates, you may be
seriously injured. Be especially careful
with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
●Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with side
air bag inflation.
WRS0032 SSS0159 SSS0162
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
1. Top tether anchor
2. Rear seat belts
3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag
4. Head restraints/headrests
5. Front seat belts
6. Supplemental front-impact air bags
7. Front crash zone sensor
8. Front seats
9. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor)
10. Satellite crash zone sensor
11. Seat belt with pretensioner
12. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag
13. Rear seats
14. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system
15. Satellite crash zone sensor
LII2124
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
Information Provided by:
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passen-
ger’s advanced air bag system, please ob-
serve the following items.
●Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket.
●Do not place heavy loads heavier than
2.2 lb (1 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.
●Do not store luggage behind the seat
that can press into the seatback.
●Do not position the front passenger
seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the
front seat does contact the rear seat,
the air bag system may determine a
sensor malfunction has occurred and
the front passenger air bag status light
may illuminate and the supplemental
air bag warning light may flash.
●If a forward facing child restraint is in-
stalled in the front passenger seat, do
not position the front passenger seat so
the child restraint contacts the instru-
ment panel. If the child restraint does
contact the instrument panel, the sys-
tem may determine the seat is occupied
and the passenger air bag may deploy
in a collision. Also the front passenger
air bag status light may not illuminate.
See “Child restraints” in this section for
information about installing and using
child restraints.
●Confirm the operating condition with
the front passenger air bag status light.
●If you notice that the front passenger air
bag status light is not operating as de-
scribed in this section, please take your
vehicle to your NISSAN dealer to check
the occupant classification system.
●Until you have confirmed with your
dealer that your passenger seat occu-
pant classification system is working
properly, position the occupants in the
rear seating positions.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front
passenger seats. This system is designed to
meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-
lations. It is also permitted in Canada. All of the
information, cautions and warnings in this
manual must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is
mounted in the dashboard above the glove box.
The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they may in-
flate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper front air bag system opera-
tion.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual
stage inflators. It also monitors information from
the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit
(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors and Occupant
Classification Sensor (weight sensor). Inflator
operation is based on the severity of a collision
and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front
passenger, the occupant classification sensors
are also monitored. Based on information from
the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in a
crash, depending on the crash severity and
whether the front occupants are belted or un-
belted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag
may be automatically turned OFF under some
conditions, depending on the weight detected on
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
the passenger seat and how the seat belt is used.
If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passen-
ger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the
seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illumi-
nated, but the air bag will be off). See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” in this section
for further details. One front air bag inflating does
not indicate improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN
dealer. If you are considering modification of your
vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the
front of this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the face and
chest of the front occupants. They can help save
lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an
inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions
or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide
restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts
should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-
senger seated upright as far as practical away
from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The
front air bags inflate quickly in order to help
protect the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the front air bag inflating can increase the
risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
against, the front air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-
onds if the system is operational.
Front passenger air bag and status light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some condi-
tions. Read this section carefully to learn
how it operates. Proper use of the seat,
seat belt and child restraints is necessary
for most effective protection. Failure to
follow all instructions in this manual con-
cerning the use of seats, seat belts and
child restraints can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
WRS0475
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
Information Provided by:
Status light
The front passenger air bag status light is
located above the audio controls. After the igni-
tion switch is placed in the ⬙ON⬙position, the
front passenger air bag status light on the instru-
ment panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and
then turns off or remains illuminated depending
on the front passenger seat occupied status. The
light operates as follows:
●Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The is
OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF
and will not inflate in a crash.
●Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,
child or child restraint as outlined in this
section: The illuminates to indicate
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and
will not inflate in a crash.
●Occupied passenger seat and the passen-
ger meet the conditions outlined in this sec-
tion: The light is OFF to indicate that
the front passenger air bag is operational.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-
matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated
under some conditions as described below in
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front
passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-
matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to
meet the requirements.
The occupant classification sensors (weight sen-
sors) are on the seat cushion frame under the
front passenger seat and are designed to detect
an occupant and objects on the seat. For ex-
ample, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the
Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the
passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the
regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type
specified in the regulations is on the seat, the
occupant classification sensors can detect it and
cause the air bag to turn OFF.
The front passenger seat belt sensor is designed
to detect if the seat belt is buckled. Based on the
weight on the seat detected by the occupant
classification sensor and the buckle state, the
Advanced Air Bag System determines whether
the front passenger air bag should be automati-
cally turned OFF as required by the regulations.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as out-
lined in this manual should not cause the passen-
ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For
small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the
occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-
ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting
on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out
of position), this could cause the sensor to turn
the air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and
wearing the seat belt properly for the most effec-
tive protection by the seat belt and supplemental
air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
restraints and booster seats be properly installed
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
classification sensor and seat belt sensors are
designed to operate as described above to turn
the front passenger air bag OFF for specified
child restraints as required by the regulations.
Failing to properly secure child restraints and to
use the ALR mode (child restraint mode) may
allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or
sudden stop. This can also result in the passen-
ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being
OFF. See “Child restraints” in this section for
proper use and installation.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied the
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
the object’s weight detected by the occupant
classification sensor. Other conditions could also
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants
are seated and restrained properly.
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can
monitor when the front passenger air bag is au-
tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.
The light will not illuminate when the front pas-
senger seat is unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-
ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat
properly or not using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the passenger air bag status light may or may not
be illuminated, depending on the size of the child
and the type of child restraint being used. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that
the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be
that the child restraint or seat belt is not being
used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is
installed properly, the seat belt is used properly
and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-
minate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, the system may be sensing
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
until you have confirmed with your dealer that
your air bag is working properly, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and
passenger air bag status light will take a few
seconds to register a change in the passenger
seat status. For example, if a large adult who is
sitting in the front passenger seat exits the ve-
hicle, the passenger air bag status light will go
from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to
OFF. This is normal system operation and does
not indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
light , located in the meter and gauges area
in the center of the instrument panel, will blink.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions
WARNING
●Do not place any objects on the steering
wheel pad or on the instrument panel.
Also, do not place any objects between
any occupant and the steering wheel or
instrument panel. Such objects may be-
come dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if the front air bags inflate.
●Do not place objects with sharp edges
on the seat. Also, do not place heavy
objects on the seat that will leave per-
manent impressions in the seat. Such
objects can damage the seat or occu-
pant classification sensors (weight sen-
sors). This can affect the operation of
the air bag system and result in serious
personal injury.
●Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classifica-
tion sensors. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and
result in serious personal injury.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
Information Provided by:
●Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will be
hot. Do not touch them; you may se-
verely burn yourself.
●No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This is
to prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.
●Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
pension system or front end structure.
This could affect proper operation of
the front air bag system.
●Tampering with the front air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
Tampering includes changes to the
steering wheel and the instrument
panel assembly by placing material
over the steering wheel pad and above
the instrument panel or by installing
additional trim material around the air
bag system.
●Removing or modifying the front pas-
senger seat may affect the function of
the air bag and result in serious per-
sonal injury.
●Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing mate-
rial on the seat cushion or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat
covers, on the seat that are not specifi-
cally designed to assure proper air bag
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
objects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
objects may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant classification
sensor (weight sensor).
●No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect the
front air bag system. Tampering with
the seat belt system may result in seri-
ous personal injury.
●Work on and around the front air bag
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
ment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring should not be
modified or disconnected. Unauthor-
ized electrical test equipment and prob-
ing devices should not be used on the
air bag system.
●A cracked windshield should be re-
placed immediately by a qualified repair
facility. A cracked windshield could af-
fect the function of the supplemental air
bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the supplemental front air
bag system and guide the buyer to the appropri-
ate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and roof-
mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside of the
seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags
are located in the side roof rails. All of the
information, cautions and warnings in this
manual must be followed. The side air bags
and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity side collisions, although they may
inflate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity impact. They
are designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in cer-
tain side collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper side air bag and curtain air
bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed
by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken
not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-
dition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest of
the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to
cushion the impact force to the head of occu-
pants in the front and rear outboard seating po-
sitions. They can help save lives and reduce
serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag
and curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other
injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not
provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat
passengers should be seated as far away as
practical from the door finishers and side roof
rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate
quickly in order to help protect the front and rear
outboard occupants. Because of this, the force of
the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can
increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
close to, or is against, these air bag modules
during inflation. The side air bags and curtain air
bags will deflate quickly after the collision is over.
The side air bags and curtain air bags op-
erate only when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-
onds if the system is operational.
WARNING
●Do not place any objects near the seat-
back of the front seats. Also, do not
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
etc.) between the front door finisher
and the front seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if a side air bag inflates.
●Right after inflation, several side air bag
and curtain air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
LRS0259
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
Information Provided by:
●No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to or
accidental inflation of the side air bag
and curtain air bag or damage to the
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
●Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
pension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
●Tampering with the side air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
For example, do not change the front
seats by placing material near the seat-
backs or by installing additional trim
material, such as seat covers, around
the side air bag.
●Work around and on the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems should be
done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation
of electrical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-
ing harnesses* should not be modified
or disconnected. Unauthorized electri-
cal test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the side air bag
or curtain air bag systems.
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the side air bag and
curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to
the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
Seat belts with pretensioners (front
seats)
WARNING
●The pretensioners cannot be reused af-
ter activation. They must be replaced
together with the retractor and buckle
as a unit.
●If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but a pretensioner is not acti-
vated, be sure to have the pretensioner
system checked and, if necessary, re-
placed by your NISSAN dealer.
●No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to pre-
vent damage to or accidental activation
of the pretensioners. Tampering with
the pretensioner system may result in
serious personal injury.
●Work around and on the pretensioner
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
ment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pretensioner system.
●If you need to dispose of a pretensioner
or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate with the
supplemental air bag system in certain types of
collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor,
the pretensioner helps tighten the seat belt when
the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of
collisions, helping to restrain front seat occu-
pants.
The pretensioner is encased within the seat belt
retractor. These seat belts are used the same way
as conventional seat belts.
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
reduce forces against the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning light is
used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner
system. (See ⬙SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT⬙in this section for more de-
tails.) If the operation of the supplemental air bag
warning light indicates there is a malfunction,
have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
1. SRS Front Air Bag Warning Labels
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental front-
impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as
shown in the illustration.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying in the instrument panel, moni-
tors the circuits for the air bag systems, preten-
sioners and all related wiring.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This means the system is operational.
WRS0897 LRS0100
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
Information Provided by:
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-
sioner systems need servicing:
●The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
●The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
●The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air
bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may
not operate properly. They must be checked and
repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-
sioner systems will not operate in an acci-
dent. To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
Repair and replacement procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags
and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a
one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is
damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light
remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.
Repair and replacement of these supplemental
air bag systems should be done only by a
NISSAN dealer.
When maintenance work is required on the ve-
hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags, pretensioners and related parts should be
pointed out to the person performing the mainte-
nance. The ignition switch should always be
placed in the LOCK position when working under
the hood or inside the vehicle.
WARNING
●Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag
module will not function again and
must be replaced. Additionally, the acti-
vated pretensioner must also be re-
placed. The air bag module and preten-
sioner should be replaced by a NISSAN
dealer. The air bag module and preten-
sioner cannot be repaired.
●The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected by a
NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to
the front end or side portion of the
vehicle.
●If you need to dispose of the supple-
mental air bag or pretensioner systems
or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
●If there is an impact to your vehicle from
any direction, your Occupant Detection
Sensor (ODS) should be checked by a
NISSAN dealer to verify it is still func-
tioning correctly. The ODS should be
checked even if no air bags deploy as a
result of the impact. Failure to verify
proper ODS function may result in an
improper air bag deployment resulting
in injury or death.
NOTE:
In the event of a crash involving an airbag
deployment (side, front or both), the vehi-
cle’s hazard lamps (turn indicators) will ac-
tivate.
1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
MEMO
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
Information Provided by:
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel...................................2-2
Meters and gauges ................................2-3
Speedometer and odometer . . ...................2-3
Tachometer ....................................2-5
Engine coolant temperature gauge ...............2-6
Fuel gauge ....................................2-6
Trip computer ..................................2-7
Outside temperature display . . ...................2-8
Compass display (if so equipped) ...................2-8
Compass display ...............................2-9
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ......2-12
Checking bulbs ...............................2-13
Warning lights ................................2-13
Indicator lights ................................2-17
Audible reminders .............................2-20
Security systems .................................2-21
Vehicle security system (if so equipped)..........2-21
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system
(if so equipped) ...............................2-23
Windshield wiper and washer switch ...............2-24
Switch operation ..............................2-24
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch ..................................2-25
Headlight and turn signal switch....................2-26
Headlight control switch........................2-26
Daytime running light system (Canada only) ......2-28
Instrument brightness control ...................2-29
Turn signal switch .............................2-29
Fog light switch (if so equipped) ................2-29
Horn ............................................2-30
Heated seats (if so equipped)......................2-30
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch...........2-31
Power outlet .....................................2-32
Storage .........................................2-33
Map pockets..................................2-33
Storage trays .................................2-33
Storage pouch ................................2-34
Seatback pockets (if so equipped) ..............2-34
Sunglasses holder.............................2-35
Cup holders ..................................2-36
Glove box ....................................2-37
Console box ..................................2-37
Slide front armrest (if so equipped) ..............2-38
Cargo net (if so equipped)......................2-39
Windows ........................................2-39
Power windows ...............................2-39
Information Provided by:
Moonroof (if so equipped) .........................2-42
Power moonroof...............................2-42
Interior lights .....................................2-44
Console light..................................2-45
Dome light.......................................2-45
Map lights .......................................2-46
Trunk light .......................................2-46
Information Provided by:
1. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-26)
2. Steering wheel switch for trip
computer, audio control and
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(if so equipped) (P. 2-7, 4-65)
3. Driver’s supplemental air bag/Horn
(P. 1-44, 2-30)
4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
5. Cruise control main/set switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-24)
6. Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-24)
7. Ventilator (P. 4-16)
8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)
9. Audio system (P. 4-27)
10. Passenger’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-44)
11. Glove box (P. 2-37)
12. Shift lever (P. 5-17)
13. Climate control (P. 4-16, 4-24)
14. Ignition switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-8, 5-10)
15. Telescopic steering (P.3-27)
16. Hood release (P. 3-23)
17. Fuel filler door release (P. 3-25)
18. ECO mode switch (P. 5-22); SPORT
mode switch (P.5-22); Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF switch (P.2-31)
19. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-29);
Power mirror switch (P.3-30); Trunk
release (P.3-24)
* Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LIC2657
INSTRUMENT PANEL
2-2 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
1. Engine coolant temperature gauge
2. Fuel gauge
3. Speedometer
4. Odometer/twin trip odometer/trip
computer/fuel economy/Eco Pedal Indi-
cator
5. Tachometer
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.
LIC2658
LIC2255
METERS AND GAUGES
Instruments and controls 2-3
Information Provided by:
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer 䊊
2and the twin trip odometer 䊊
1
are displayed when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.
To switch between the odometer and the twin trip
odometers press the button on the steer-
ing wheel.
Changing the display:
Push the button on the steering wheel to
change the display as follows:
Accel guide/Average fuel economy →Instant fuel
economy/Average fuel economy →Average fuel
economy →Average speed →Distance to empty
→Trip A →Trip B
Resetting the trip odometer:
Push the button on the steering wheel for
more than 1 second to reset the currently dis-
played trip odometer to zero.
Loose fuel cap warning message
Push the reset button 䊊
Afor more than 1 second
to reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes-
sage 䊊
Bafter the fuel cap has been tightened.
For additional information see “Fuel-filler cap” in
the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments”section
of this manual.
LIC2411 LPD2124
2-4 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
Check tire pressure warning message
The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is
displayed when the low tire pressure warning
light is illuminated and low tire pressure is de-
tected. Check and adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label. The CHECK
TIRE PRES warning message turns off when the
low tire pressure warning light turns off.
The low tire pressure warning light remains illu-
minated until the tires are inflated to the recom-
mended COLD tire pressure. The CHECK TIRE
PRES warning message is displayed each time
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as
long as the low tire pressure warning light re-
mains illuminated. For more information see “Low
tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments
and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” and
“Wheels and tires” section in the “Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section of this Owner’s
Manual.
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-
lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into
the red zone 䊊
1.
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, reduce engine speed. Operating the
engine in the red zone may cause serious
engine damage.
LIC2678 LIC2219
Instruments and controls 2-5
Information Provided by:
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be placed in the
ON position for the gauge to give a reading.
The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-
ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the
normal range when the reading is within the zone
䊊
Ashown in the illustration.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
outside air temperature and driving conditions.
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates a coolant tempera-
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
the temperature. If the gauge is over the
normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is over-
heated, continued operation of the vehicle
may seriously damage the engine. See “If
your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section for immediate action
required
FUEL GAUGE
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be placed in the
ON position for the gauge to give a reading.
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-
ters 0 (Empty).
LIC2414 LIC2445
2-6 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
The indicates that the fuel-filler door is
located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
CAUTION
●If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
come on. Refuel as soon as possible.
After a few driving trips. the light
should turn off. If the light remains on
after a few driving trips, have the vehicle
inspected by a NISSAN dealer.
●For additional information, see “Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL)” in this
section.
TRIP COMPUTER
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the modes of the trip computer can be
selected by pressing the button on the
steering wheel. The following modes can be se-
lected:
●Trip A
●Trip B
●ECO Pedal Indicator
●Instant fuel economy
●Average fuel economy
●Average speed
●Distance to empty
●Trip computer reset
Trip A
Measures the distance of one specific trip.
Trip B
Measures the distance of a second specific trip.
ECO Pedal Indicator Display
Use the ECO Pedal Indicator䊊
1for improving
fuel economy.
When the ECO Pedal Indicator bar is in the green
range, it displays the recommended accelerator
pedal position to optimize fuel economy.
If the ECO Pedal Indicator bar is out of green
range, the vehicle will not provide optimized fuel
economy.
LIC2659
Instruments and controls 2-7
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
The ECO Pedal Indicator’s bar is not dis-
played when the cruise control is in opera-
tion.
Instant fuel economy
The instant fuel economy mode shows the instant
fuel economy. The display updates instantly when
driving.
Average fuel economy
The average fuel economy mode shows the av-
erage fuel economy since the last reset. Reset-
ting is done by pressing the button on the
steering wheel for more than approximately
1 second. The display is updated every 30 sec-
onds. At about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a
reset, the display shows (----).
Average speed
The average speed mode shows the average
vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done
by pressing the button on the steering
wheel for more than approximately 1 second. The
display is updated every 30 seconds. The first
30 seconds after a reset, the display shows
(----).
Distance to empty
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The dte is constantly be-
ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the
fuel tank and the actual fuel economy.
The display is updated every 30 seconds.
NOTE:
When driving uphill or rounding curves, the
fuel in the tank shifts, which may momen-
tarily change the display.
Trip computer reset
To reset Trip A, Trip B, AVG/mpg, or AVG/mph,
go to the desired mode on the trip computer and
hold the button on the steering wheel for
more than 3 seconds.
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
The outside temperature function provides a dis-
play of the outside temperature when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
The display of positive temperatures is unsigned
(blank), negative temperatures are prefixed with a
minus sign.
This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-
dicates heading direction of vehicle.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
the button as described in the chart below
to activate various features of the automatic anti-
glare rearview mirror.
Press and hold
the
button for about:
Feature:
(Press button again for about 1 sec-
ond to change settings)
0 – 3 seconds Compass display toggles on/off
3 – 6 seconds Automatic anti-glare/indicator light
toggles on/off
6 – 9 seconds Compass zone can be changed to
correct false compass readings
9 – 12 seconds Compass enters calibration mode
For more information about the automatic anti-
glare feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rear-
view mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and ad-
justments” section.
COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)
2-8 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
COMPASS DISPLAY
Push the button for about 1 second when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to
toggle the compass direction display 䊊
1on or
off. The display will indicate the direction that the
vehicle is heading.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by
driving the vehicle in three complete circles at
less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).
You can also calibrate the compass by driving
your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-
pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three
complete circles.
WIC0904
Instruments and controls 2-9
Information Provided by:
Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north and geo-
graphical north is known as variance. In some
areas, this difference can sometimes be great
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow
these instructions to set the variance for your
particular location if this happens:
1. Press and hold the button for about
11 seconds. The current zone number will
appear in the display. Release the button.
2. Find your current location on the zone map.
Refer to the illustration.
3. Press the button repeatedly to toggle
through the zone numbers until the desired
number appears in the display. Once you
have selected a zone number, the display
will show a compass direction within a few
seconds.
Inaccurate compass direction:
The compass display is equipped with automatic
correction function. If the correct direction is not
shown, follow this procedure.
1. With the display turned on, press and hold
the button for about 13 seconds. The
“C” icon in the compass display will illumi-
nate.
WIC0355
2-10 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle
in three complete circles at a maximum
speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles, the display
should return to normal.
CAUTION
●Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the op-
eration of the compass.
●When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.
Instruments and controls 2-11
Information Provided by:
or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light
Power steering warning light High beam indicator light (blue)
or Brake warning light P position selecting warning light
(CVT models) (if so equipped)
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Charge warning light Seat belt warning light Overdrive off indicator light (CVT models)
Door open warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light
Engine oil pressure warning light Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator light (CVT models)
Side light and headlight indicator light (green)
Low fuel warning light Cruise main switch indicator light
(if so equipped)
Slip indicator light
Low tire pressure warning light ECO mode indicator light SPORT mode indicator light
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light Engine start operation indicator light
(if so equipped)
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
NISSAN Intelligent Key® lock warning light
(M/T models) (if so equipped)
Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator
light
NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light (if so
equipped)
Front passenger air bag status light
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
2-12 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
CHECKING BULBS
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake
and place the ignition switch in the ON position
without starting the engine. The following lights
will come on:
or , , , , ,
If equipped, the following lights come on briefly
and then go off:
or , , ,
If any light fails to come on, it may indicate
an open circuit in the electrical system.
Have the system repaired promptly.
WARNING LIGHTS
or Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light illuminates and then turns off. This
indicates the ABS is operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
engine is running or while driving, it may indicate
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-
tion is turned off. The brake system then operates
normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See
“Brake system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion.
or Brake warning light
This light functions for both the parking brake and
the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on when the parking
brake is applied.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.
If the light comes on while the engine is running
with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-
hicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
as necessary. See “Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
WARNING
●Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on. Driv-
ing could be dangerous. If you judge it
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest
service station for repairs. Otherwise,
have your vehicle towed because driv-
ing it could be dangerous.
●Pressing the brake pedal with the en-
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping dis-
tance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
●If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate the
ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake
system checked, and if necessary, repaired by a
NISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driv-
ing and abrupt braking. See “Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warning light” in this section.
Instruments and controls 2-13
Information Provided by:
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running,
it may indicate the charging system is not func-
tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check
the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,
missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN
dealer immediately.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing.
Door open warning light
This light comes on when any of the doors are not
closed securely while the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
Engine oil pressure warning
light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the
light flickers or comes on during normal driving,
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other
authorized repair shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is not
designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the
dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause se-
rious damage to the engine almost imme-
diately. Such damage is not covered by
warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it
is safe to do so.
Low fuel warning light
This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel
tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-
nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0
(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel
in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches 0
(Empty).
Low tire pressure warning light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second
and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning mes-
sage is also displayed in the odometer.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the
tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-
mended COLD tire pressure shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label located
in the driver’s door opening. The low tire
pressure warning light does not automati-
cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-
justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-
ommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low
tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-
sure gauge to check the tire pressure.
The low tire pressure warning light remains illu-
minated until the tires are inflated to the recom-
mended COLD tire pressure. The CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE warning message is displayed each
time the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position as long as the low tire pressure warning
light remains illuminated.
2-14 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
For additional information, see “Check tire pres-
sure warning message” in the “Instruments and
controls” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving”
section and in the “In case of emergency” sec-
tion.
TPMS malfunction:
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. The light will remain on
after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
warning message is not displayed if the low tire
pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a
TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.
WARNING
●Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufac-
turer for the possible influences before
use.
●If the light does not illuminate with the
ignition switch placed in the ON posi-
tion, have the vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
●If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and in-
crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-
rious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could result
in serious personal injury. Check the
tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the
tire pressure to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label located
in the driver’s door opening to turn the
low tire pressure warning light OFF. If
the light still comes on while driving
after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire
may be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-
place it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
●Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
CAUTION
●The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
●If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.
●Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the 4 wheels correctly.
Instruments and controls 2-15
Information Provided by:
Low windshield-washer fluid
warning light
This light comes on when the windshield-washer
fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid
as necessary. See “Windshield-washer fluid” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
NISSAN Intelligent Key® lock
warning light (M/T models) (if
so equipped)
When the ignition switch is left in the OFF posi-
tion instead of completely placing it to the LOCK
position, the Intelligent Key lock warning light
blinks red and the Intelligent Key room buzzer will
sound. The light will keep blinking until the igni-
tion switch is placed in the LOCK or ACC posi-
tion.
If the Intelligent Key lock warning light blinks and
the buzzer sounds, press the PUSH release but-
ton next to ignition knob, then turn the ignition
knob to either the LOCK or ACC position.
See “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” section.
NISSAN Intelligent Key®
warning light (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key warning light illuminates green
when the ignition switch can be turned. The
Intelligent Key warning light illuminates red when
the ignition switch cannot be turned.
The Intelligent Key warning light blinks red if the
Intelligent Key is taken outside of the vehicle
while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
ON position.
●If the Intelligent Key warning light blinks,
make sure of the location of the Intelligent
Key as soon as possible. The Intelligent Key
should be carried by the driver while operat-
ing the vehicle.
●The Intelligent Key warning light turns off
about 10 seconds after the Intelligent Key is
brought inside the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key warning light blinks green
indicating that the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged.
See “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” section.
Power steering warning light
WARNING
●If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the steering will not work. Steering will
be harder to operate.
●When the power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running,
there will be no power assist for the
steering. You will still have control of
the vehicle but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the power steering warning light illumi-
nates. After starting the engine, the power steer-
ing warning light turns off. This indicates the
power steering system is operational.
If the power steering warning light illuminates
while the engine is running, it may indicate the
power steering system is not functioning properly
and may need servicing. Have the power steering
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
When the power steering warning light illumi-
nates with the engine running, there will be no
power assist for the steering but you will still have
2-16 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steer-
ing effort is required to operate the steering
wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low
speeds.
See “Power steering” in the “Starting and driving”
section.
P position selecting warning
light (CVT models) (if so
equipped)
The light blinks red and the warning buzzer
sounds if you are outside of the vehicle with the
Intelligent Key and the engine is off, but the shift
lever is not in the P (Park) position.
When the warning light blinks, place the ignition
switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to
the P (Park) position, then place the ignition
switch in the LOCK position.
Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten your
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START
position and remains illuminated until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime
sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s
seat belt is securely fastened.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For
7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the system does not activate the
warning light for the front passenger.
Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section
for precautions on seat belt usage.
Supplemental air bag warning
light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-
sioner seat belt systems need servicing and your
vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:
●The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
●The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
●The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental
restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-
tensioners may not function properly. For addi-
tional details see “Supplemental restraint sys-
tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag systems
and/or pretensioner systems will not op-
erate in an accident. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) position
indicator light (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this indicator light shows the transmis-
sion shift lever position. See “Driving the vehicle”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Instruments and controls 2-17
Information Provided by:
Cruise main switch indicator
light (if so equipped)
The light comes on when the cruise control main
switch is pushed. The light goes out when the
main switch is pushed again. When the cruise
main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise
control system is operational.
ECO mode indicator light
This light comes on when the ECO mode has
been selected. See “ECO mode” in the “Starting
and driving” section for the use of the ECO mode
switch.
Engine start operation
indicator (if so equipped)
For vehicles equipped with push button ignition
this indicator illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON position.
This indicator means that the engine will start by
pushing the push-button ignition switch with the
brake pedal and clutch pedal (if so equipped)
depressed.
Front fog light indicator light (if
so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when
the front fog lights are ON. See “Fog light switch”
in this section.
Front passenger air bag status
light
The front passenger air bag status light will be lit
and the passenger front air bag will be OFF
depending on how the front passenger seat is
being used.
For front passenger air bag status light operation,
see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in
the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.
High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high
beams are on and goes out when the low beams
are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes on
when the passing signal is activated.
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate a
potential emission control malfunction.
The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come
on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make
sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons
(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
After a few driving trips, the light should
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 sec-
onds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the
engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle
is not ready for an emission control system
inspection/maintenance test. See “Readiness for
inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Tech-
nical and consumer information” section of this
manual.
2-18 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
Operation
The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in
one of two ways:
●Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An
emission control system malfunction has
been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if
the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in
the vehicle information display. If the fuel-
filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install
the cap and continue to drive the vehicle.
The light should turn off after a few
driving trips. If the light does not turn
off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle
inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not
need to have your vehicle towed to the
dealer.
●Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An
engine misfire has been detected which may
damage the emission control system. To re-
duce or avoid emission control system dam-
age:
– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
(72 km/h).
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking
and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected
by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without hav-
ing the emission control system checked
and repaired as necessary could lead to
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,
and possible damage to the emission con-
trol system.
Overdrive OFF indicator light
(CVT models) (if so equipped)
The overdrive OFF indicator light illuminates
when the overdrive off mode is selected.
For additional information, see “Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT)” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Security indicator light
For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This light
blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.
For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light blinks
when the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK
position with the key removed from the ignition
switch.
The blinking security indicator light indicates that
the security systems equipped on the vehicle are
operational.
For additional information, see “Security sys-
tems” in this section.
Side light and headlight
indicator light (green)
The side light and headlight indicator light illumi-
nates when the side light or headlight position is
selected. See “Headlight and turn signal switch”
in this section for further details.
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system or the traction control
system is operating, thus alerting that the vehicle
is nearing its traction limits. The road surface may
be slippery.
Instruments and controls 2-19
Information Provided by:
SPORT mode indicator light
The SPORT mode indicator light illuminates
when the SPORT mode is turned ON. See “Sport
mode” in the “Starting and driving” section for the
use of the SPORT mode switch.
Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal
switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned
on.
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) off indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle
Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF.
This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control has
been turned off.
Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch
again or restart the engine and the system will
operate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion of this manual.
The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on
when you place the ignition switch in the ON
position. The light will turn off after about 2 sec-
onds if the system is operational. If the light stays
on or comes on along with the indicator
light while you are driving, have the Vehicle Dy-
namic Control system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear
the system working when starting the vehicle or
accelerating, but this is normal.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove
the key and take it with you when leaving the
vehicle.
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-
tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is
opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-
ing the vehicle.
NISSAN Intelligent Key® door buzzer
(if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one
of the following improper operations is found.
●The ignition switch is not returned to the
LOCK position when locking the doors.
●The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle
when locking the doors.
●The Intelligent Key is taken outside the ve-
hicle when operating the vehicle.
●Any doors are not closed securely when
locking the doors.
When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both
the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. See “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section.
2-20 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
Parking brake reminder chime
A chime sounds if the parking brake is set and the
vehicle is driven. The chime will stop if the parking
brake is released or the vehicle speed returns to
zero.
Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-
tems:
●Vehicle security system (if so equipped)
●NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
The vehicle security system provides visual and
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors
when the system is armed. It is not, however, a
motion detection type system that activates when
a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.
The system helps detect vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-
ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a
brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,
and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be
aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,
well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection, such
as component locks, identification markers, and
tracking systems, are available at auto supply
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer
may also offer such equipment. Check with your
insurance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection features.
How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
armed even if the windows are open.)
2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion and remove the key.
3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors
can be locked with:
●the power door lock switch (if the door is
opened, locked and then closed).
●the key — master or mechanical (Intelli-
gent Key models).
LIC0301
SECURITY SYSTEMS
Instruments and controls 2-21
Information Provided by:
●any request switch (Intelligent Key mod-
els).
●the keyfob or Intelligent Key.
Keyfob and Intelligent Key operation:
●Push the button. All doors lock.
The hazard lights flash twice and the horn
beeps once to indicate all doors are
locked.
●When the button is pushed with
all doors locked, the hazard lights flash
twice and the horn beeps once as a re-
minder that the doors are already locked.
The horn may or may not beep. Refer to
“Silencing the horn beep feature” in the
“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-
tion in this manual.
4. Confirm that the indicator light comes
on. The light stays on for about
30 seconds. The vehicle security system is
now pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the
vehicle security system automatically shifts
into the armed phase. The light begins
to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the
30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’s
door is unlocked by the key, a request
switch, the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or if the
ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON
position, the system will not arm.
●If the key is turned slowly when locking
the driver’s door, the system may not
arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned
beyond the vertical position toward the
unlock position to remove the key, the
system may be disarmed when the key
is removed. If the indicator light fails to
glow for a period of time, unlock the
door once and lock it again.
●Even when the driver and/or passen-
gers are in the vehicle, the system will
arm with all doors closed and locked
with the ignition switch placed in the
OFF position.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following
alarm:
●The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.
●The alarm automatically turns off after a pe-
riod of time. However, the alarm reactivates if
the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm
can be shut off by unlocking the driver’s door
with the key, a request switch, by pressing
the button on the keyfob or Intelligent
Key or placing the ignition switch in the ON
or ACC position.
The alarm is activated by:
●opening a door without using the key, a
request switch, keyfob or Intelligent Key
(even if the door is unlocked by using the
inside lock knob or the power door lock
switch).
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s
door with the key, pressing the button on
the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or by unlocking all
doors with any request switch (Intelligent Key
models) or placing the ignition switch in the ON
or ACC position.
2-22 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of a
registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
cedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the ON
position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
rate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with RSS-210 of In-
dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Security indicator light
For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This light
blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.
For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light blinks
when the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK
position with the key removed from the ignition
switch.
This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Im-
mobilizer System is operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-
functioning, the light will remain on while the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
LIC0474
Instruments and controls 2-23
Information Provided by:
If the light still remains on and/or the en-
gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-
vice as soon as possible. Please bring all
registered keys that you have when visiting
your NISSAN dealer for service.
SWITCH OPERATION
The windshield wiper and washer operates when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
䊊
1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
can be adjusted by turning the knob 䊊
A.
䊊
2Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation
䊊
3High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-
tion
Type A
WIC2749
Type B
WIC2748
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
2-24 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
Push the lever up 䊊
4to have one sweep opera-
tion (MIST) of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you 䊊
5to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
tion may freeze on the windshield and
obscure your vision which may lead to an
accident. Warm the windshield with the
defroster before you wash the windshield.
CAUTION
●Do not operate the washer continuously
for more than 30 seconds.
●Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.
●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with windshield-washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based windshield-
washer fluid concentrates may perma-
nently stain the grille if spilled while
filling the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir.
●Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-
centrates with water to the manufactur-
er’s recommended levels before pour-
ing the fluid into the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the windshield-washer fluid con-
centrate and water.
To defrost the rear window glass and outside
mirror (if so equipped), start the engine and push
the rear window defroster switch on. The rear
window defroster indicator light on the switch
comes on. Push the switch again to turn the
defroster off.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 15 minutes.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or dam-
age the rear window defroster.
LIC2650
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
Instruments and controls 2-25
Information Provided by:
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
䊊
1When turning the switch to the posi-
tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights come on.
䊊
2When turning the switch to the posi-
tion, the headlights come on and all the other
lights remain on.
Headlight Type B is equipped with front LED
accent lights.
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
Type A
WIC1436
Type B
WIC1435
Type C
WIC1510
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
2-26 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
Autolight system (if so equipped)
The autolight system allows the headlights to be
set so they turn on and off automatically. The
autolight system can:
●Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights au-
tomatically when it is dark.
●The autolight system will turn on if the wind-
shield wipers make four continuous passes
(USA only).
●Turn off all the lights when it is light.
●Keep all the lights on a period of time after
you turn the key to OFF and all doors are
closed.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-
tion 䊊
1.
2. Turn the ignition key to ON.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a
door is opened and left open, the headlights
remain ON for a period of time. If another door is
opened while the headlights are on, then the
timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to
the OFF, ,or position.
Be sure you do not put anything on top of
the autolight sensor located in the top side
of the instrument panel. The autolight sen-
sor controls the autolight; if it is covered,
the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark
out and the headlights will illuminate. If
this occurs while parked with the engine off
and the key in the ON position, your vehi-
cle’s battery could become discharged.
Type D
WIC1509 LIC2351
Instruments and controls 2-27
Information Provided by:
Headlight beam select
䊊
1To select the high beam function, push the
lever forward. The high beam lights come on
and the light illuminates.
䊊
2Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
䊊
3Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
headlight high beams on and off.
Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
while the headlight switch is in the
or position, the headlights will turn off after
a period of time.
CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature au-
tomatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the head-
light switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
(Canada only)
The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-
duced intensity when the engine is started with
the parking brake released. The daytime running
lights operate with the headlight switch in the
OFF position or in the position. Turn the
headlight switch to the position for full
illumination when driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-
nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
the parking brake is released. The daytime run-
ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position.
WARNING
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
an accident injuring yourself and others.
WIC1438
2-28 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
** Click HERE to see "Owner's Manual
Supplement" beginning on page 2. **
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
Push the “+” button 䊊
Ato increase the bright-
ness of instrument panel lights when driving at
night.
Push the “-” button 䊊
Bto decrease the bright-
ness of instrument panel lights when driving at
night.
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
䊊
1Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is com-
pleted, the turn signal cancels automatically.
Lane change signal
䊊
2To signal a lane change, move the lever up or
down to the point where the indicator light
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.
The turn signal will flash three times automati-
cally.
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch
to the position, then turn the fog light
switch to the position.
If the headlight switch is in the AUTO position
and the fog light switch is moved to the ON
position, both the fog lights and the headlights
(including all other outside lights) will turn on.
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch
to the OFF position.
LIC2418 WIC1439 WIC1440
Instruments and controls 2-29
Information Provided by:
Using the fog light switch in AUTO mode forces
the headlights to come on, even if the light sensor
has not activated them. The fog lights automati-
cally turn off when the high beam headlights are
selected.
To sound the horn, push near the horn icon on the
steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system. Tam-
pering with the supplemental front air bag
system may result in serious personal
injury.
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as
desired. The indicator light in the switch will
illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch
off.
LIC2419 LIC1543
HORN HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)
2-30 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the
seat heater if you or the occupants cannot
monitor elevated seat temperatures or
have an inability to feel pain in body parts
that contact the seat. Use of the seat
heater by such people could result in seri-
ous injury.
CAUTION
●The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
●Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
seat.
●Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-
ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
may become overheated.
●Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
●Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
●When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-
lar materials.
●If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked
by your NISSAN dealer.
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-
ing conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck
vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
switch. The indicator will come on.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dy-
namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and
driving” section.
LIC1548
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
Instruments and controls 2-31
Information Provided by:
The power outlets are for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones. They
are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.
The power outlets are powered only when the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
CAUTION
●The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
●Only certain power outlets are designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do
not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter. See your NISSAN
dealer for additional information.
●Do not use with accessories that exceed
a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
●Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
●Use power outlets with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
●Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
●Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
●Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
●When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.
Center Console
LIC2420
Console Box (if so equipped)
LIC2307
POWER OUTLET
2-32 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
MAP POCKETS STORAGE TRAYS
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays to
help prevent injury in an accident or sud-
den stop.
LIC2426
Storage Tray
LIC2421 LIC2422
STORAGE
Instruments and controls 2-33
Information Provided by:
STORAGE POUCH
A storage pouch is located on the front of the
driver’s and passenger’s seats.
WARNING
●Do not store angular, sharp, heavy ob-
jects or objects that cannot fully fit in-
side the pouch because they might in-
crease the likelihood of an injury in a
crash.
To ensure proper operation of the pas-
senger’s advanced air bag system,
please observe the following items:
●Do not place loads heavier than 0.55lb
(0.25 kg) on the cushion storage pouch.
●Do not place a combined weight ex-
ceeding 2.2lb (1 kg) on the seatback,
head restraint, seatback pocket and
storage pouch at the same time.
SEATBACK POCKETS (if so
equipped)
The seatback pockets are located on the back of
the driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pockets
can be used to store maps.
LIC2704 LIC1328
2-34 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
driving to prevent an accident.
CAUTION
●Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
●Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.
LIC2312
Front
LIC2424
Instruments and controls 2-35
Information Provided by:
CUP HOLDERS
CAUTION
●Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
●Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
CAUTION
●Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
●Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.
Rear
LIC2656
Front
LIC2423
2-36 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
Soft bottle holder
CAUTION
●Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
●Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the handle.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
CONSOLE BOX
To open the console box, press in on the lever 䊊
1
and raise the lid 䊊
2.
To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.
Rear
LIC2425 LIC2429 LIC1026
Instruments and controls 2-37
Information Provided by:
SLIDE FRONT ARMREST (if so
equipped)
To adjust the front armrest, take the leather cover
and slide it to the front or rear.
LIC2652
WIC0733
2-38 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
CARGO NET (if so equipped)
WARNING
●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.
●Be sure to secure all four hooks into the
retainers. The cargo restrained in the
net must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or
the net may not stay secured.
The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo
area from moving around while the vehicle is in
motion. To install the cargo net, attach the net to the
retainers.
To remove the cargo net, detach the net from the
cargo net retainers.
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
●Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
it is in motion and before closing the
windows. Use the window lock switch to
prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
●Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls and become
trapped in a window. Unattended chil-
dren could become involved in serious
accidents.
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, or for a
period of time after the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s
door is opened during this period of time, the
power to the windows is canceled.
LIC0802
WINDOWS
Instruments and controls 2-39
Information Provided by:
1. Window lock button
2. Power door lock switch
3. Front passenger side switch
4. Right rear passenger side switch
5. Left rear passenger side switch
6. Driver side automatic switch
Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close all of the windows.
To open a window, push the switch to the first
detent and continue to hold down until the de-
sired window position is reached. To close a
window, pull the switch to the first detent and
continue to hold up until the desired window
position is reached.
Front passenger’s power window
switch
The passenger’s window switch operates only
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
the window, push the switch to the first detent
and continue to hold it down until the desired
window position is reached 䊊
1. To close the
window, pull the switch to the first detent and
continue to hold it up until the desired window
position is reached 䊊
2.
LIC2299 LIC2311
2-40 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
Rear power window switch
The rear power window switches open or close
only the corresponding windows. To open the
window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊
1.To
close the window, pull the switch up 䊊
2.
Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock button is depressed, only
the driver’s side window can be opened or
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock
function.
Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with automatic
operation, press the window switch down to the
second detent and release it; it need not be held.
The window automatically opens all the way. To
stop the window, lift the switch up while the
window is opening.
To fully close a window equipped with automatic
operation, pull the switch up to the second detent
and release it; it need not be held. The window
automatically closes all the way. To stop the win-
dow, press the switch down while the window is
closing.
Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
a window is closed by automatic operation.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window oc-
curs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the window.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced,
or jump started, the power window auto-reverse
function may not operate properly. If this occurs,
please contact the dealer to re-initialize the
power window auto-reverse system.
If the control unit detects something caught in a
window equipped with automatic operation as it
is closing, the window will be immediately low-
ered.
LIC2663 LIC0410
Instruments and controls 2-41
Information Provided by:
When the automatic operation for the
driver’s power window switch does
not operate
If the automatic operation for the driver’s power
window switch does not operate properly, per-
form the following procedure to initialize the
power window switch.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Press and hold the driver’s window switch
down until the window opens completely.
3. Release the switch.
4. Pull and hold the driver’s window switch up
to the second detent until the window glass
has reached the full close position. Con-
tinue to hold the window switch in the
up position for 5 seconds after the win-
dow glass has reached the full close
position. (It is necessary for this entire step
to be completed with one continuous pull of
the window switch.)
5. Release the switch.
Initialization is now complete. The automatic op-
eration for the driver’s power window switch
should now operate.
If the automatic operation does not operate prop-
erly after performing the above procedure, see a
NISSAN dealer for assistance.
No initialization is required for all the other win-
dow switches.
POWER MOONROOF
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The power
moonroof is operational for a period of time, even
if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF
position. If the driver’s door or the front passen-
ger’s door is opened during this period of time,
the power to the moonroof is canceled.
LIC2313
MOONROOF (if so equipped)
2-42 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
Sliding the moonroof
To fully open or close the moonroof, push the
switch to the open 䊊
2or close 䊊
1position and
release it; it need not be held. The roof will
automatically open or close all the way. To stop
the roof, push the switch once more while it is
opening or closing.
Tilting the moonroof
To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then push the
switch to the tilt up position 䊊
1and release it; it
need not be held. To tilt down the moonroof, push
the switch to the tilt down position 䊊
2.
Resetting the moonroof switch
If the moonroof does not operate properly, per-
form the following procedure to initialize the
moonroof operation system.
1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by
repeatedly pushing the moonroof switch to
the close position 䊊
1to tilt the moonroof up.
2. Push and hold the switch to the close posi-
tion 䊊
1.
3. Release the moonroof switch after the
moonroof moves slightly up and down.
4. Push and hold the switch to the open posi-
tion 䊊
2to fully tilt the moonroof down.
5. Check if the moonroof switch operates nor-
mally.
If the moonroof does not operate properly after
performing the procedure above, have your ve-
hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Auto-reverse function (when closing or
tilting down the moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-
matic operation when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position or for a period of time
after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof
occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the moonroof.
When closing:
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof
will immediately open backward.
When tilting down:
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-
mediately tilt up.
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-
peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds
after it happens; the moonroof will fully close
gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the
moonroof.
WARNING
●In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
●Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of
the moonroof opening while the vehicle
is in motion or while the moonroof is
closing.
Instruments and controls 2-43
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
●Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
●Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.
Sunshade
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-
ward or backward.
If the moonroof does not close
Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the
moonroof.
䊊
1The interior light can be turned ON regard-
less of door position. The light will go off after
a period of time unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position when any door is
opened.
䊊
2The interior lights can be set to operate
when the doors are opened. To turn off the
interior lights when a door open, push the
switch, the interior lights will not illuminate,
regardless of door position.
The lights will go off when the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position, or the driver’s
door is closed and locked. The lights will also
go off after a period of time when the doors
are open.
NOTE:
The step lights illuminate when the driver
and passenger doors are opened regard-
less of the interior light switch position.
These lights will turn off automatically after
a period of time while doors are open to
prevent the battery from becoming dis-
charged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
LIC2302
INTERIOR LIGHTS
2-44 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
CONSOLE LIGHT
The console light will turn on whenever the park-
ing lights or headlights are illuminated.
The interior light has a three-position switch and
operates regardless of ignition switch position.
When the switch is in the ON position 䊊
1, the
interior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi-
tion. The lights will go off after a period of time
unless the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
ON position.
When the switch is in the DOOR position 䊊
2, the
interior lights will stay on for a period of time
when:
●The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key
or the power door lock switch while all doors
are closed and the ignition switch is placed
in the OFF position.
●The driver’s door is opened and then closed
while the key is removed from the ignition
switch.
●The key is removed from the ignition switch
while all doors are closed.
The lights will turn off while the timer is activated
when:
●The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, a
key, or the power door lock switch.
●The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition.
When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊
3, the
interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door
position.
The lights will turn off automatically after a period
of time while doors are open to prevent the bat-
tery from becoming discharged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
LIC2303 SIC2063A
DOME LIGHT
Instruments and controls 2-45
Information Provided by:
Push the button to turn the map lights on. To turn
them off, press the button again.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.
When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.
The light will go off after a period of time if the
trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte-
rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
LIC2304
MAP LIGHTS TRUNK LIGHT
2-46 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys.............................................3-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) .........3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys .........3-4
Doors ............................................3-4
Locking with key................................3-5
Locking with inside lock knob ....................3-5
Locking with power door lock switch .............3-5
Automatic door locks ...........................3-6
Child safety rear door lock.......................3-6
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped).........3-7
How to use remote keyless entry system ..........3-8
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) ...........3-10
Operating range...............................3-12
Door locks/unlocks precaution ..................3-13
NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation .............3-13
How to use the remote keyless entry
function ......................................3-16
Warning lights and audible reminders ............3-20
Warning signals ...............................3-20
Troubleshooting guide .........................3-22
Hood ...........................................3-23
Trunk lid .........................................3-24
Trunk lid release switch ........................3-24
Interior trunk lid release ........................3-24
Fuel-filler door ...................................3-25
Opener operation..............................3-25
Fuel-filler cap . . ...............................3-25
Tilt/telescopic steering ............................3-27
Tilt operation..................................3-27
Telescopic operation...........................3-28
Sun visors .......................................3-28
Vanity mirrors . . ...............................3-29
Card holder (driver’s side only)..................3-29
Mirrors ..........................................3-29
Rearview mirror (if so equipped).................3-29
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) ...............................3-30
Outside mirrors ...............................3-30
Information Provided by:
1. Integrated door lock keyfob
2. Key number plate
CAUTION
Do not leave the ignition key inside the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by
using the key number. NISSAN does not record
key numbers so it is very important to keep track
of your key number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer
can duplicate it.
1. Two Intelligent Keys
2. Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent
Keys)
3. Key number plate
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent
Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-
ligent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Im-
mobilizer System components.
Remote keyless entry keyfob
(if so equipped)
LPD2027 WPD0363
KEYS
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be
registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with
the Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle Immobi-
lizer System of your vehicle. Since the registra-
tion process requires erasing all memory in the
Intelligent Key components when registering new
keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you
have to the NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelligent
Key:
●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
●Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
●Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely dry.
●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
●Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code
of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
This may prevent the unauthorized use of
the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle.
For information regarding the erasing
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.
Mechanical key
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock
knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to
the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
driver’s door.
SPA1951
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed
in the Intelligent Key slot.
See “Doors” in this section.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
You can only drive your vehicle using the master
keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.
These keys have a transponder chip in the key
head.
The master key can be used for all the locks.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-
cate your existing key. As many as 5 NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used
with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to
your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-
cause the registration process will erase the
memory of all key codes previously registered
into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
After the registration process, these components
will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.
Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time
of registration will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system key,
which contains an electrical transponder,
to come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect system function.
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors cannot be opened
using the inside or outside door handles. The
doors must be unlocked to open the doors.
WARNING
●Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,
this provides greater safety in the event
of an accident by helping to prevent
persons from being thrown from the
vehicle. This also helps keep children
and others from unintentionally open-
ing the doors, and will help keep out
intruders.
●Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
●Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
DOORS
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
LOCKING WITH KEY
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors at the same time.
Turning the key toward the front 䊊
1of the vehicle
locks all doors.
Turning the key one time toward the rear 䊊
2of the
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,
returning the key to neutral 䊊
3(where the key can
only be removed and inserted) and turning it
toward the rear again 䊊
4within 5 seconds un-
locks all doors.
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move the inside
lock knob to the lock position 䊊
1, then close the
door.
To unlock the door without the key, move the
inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊
2.
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to
the lock position 䊊
1. When locking the door this
way, be certain not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
side) to the unlock position 䊊
2.
Driver’s side
LPD0461
Inside lock
SPA2726
Door lock switch
LPD2093
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
Information Provided by:
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch is moved to the
lock position and any door is open, all doors will
lock and unlock automatically. With the Intelligent
Key left in the vehicle and any door is open, all
doors will unlock automatically and a chime will
sound after the door is closed.
These functions help to prevent the Intelligent
Key from being accidentally locked inside the
vehicle.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
●All doors lock automatically when the vehicle
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
●All doors unlock automatically when the ig-
nition is placed in the OFF position (models
with Intelligent Key system) or when the key
is removed from the ignition switch (models
without Intelligent Key system).
The automatic unlock function can be de-
activated or activated. To deactivate or acti-
vate the automatic door unlock system, perform
the following procedure:
1. Close all doors.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,
push and hold the power door lock switch to
the position (UNLOCK) for more than
5 seconds.
4. When activated, the hazard indicator will
flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard
indicator will flash once.
5. The ignition switch must be placed in the
OFF and ON position again between each
setting change.
When the automatic door unlock system is deac-
tivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position (models with
Intelligent Key system) or when the key is re-
moved from the ignition switch (models without
Intelligent Key system). To unlock the door manu-
ally, use the inside lock knob or the power door
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side).
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
from being opened accidentally, especially when
small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the unlock position 䊊
2, the
door can be opened from the outside or the
inside.
When the lever is in the LOCK position 䊊
1,
the door can be opened only from the out-
side.
LPD2117
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufac-
turer for the possible influences before
use.
●The remote keyless entry keyfob trans-
mits radio waves when the buttons are
pressed. The FAA advises radio waves
may affect aircraft navigation and com-
munication systems. Do not operate the
remote keyless entry keyfob while on
an airplane. Make sure the buttons are
not operated unintentionally when the
unit is stored for a flight.
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the
interior lights on, and activate the panic alarm by
using the keyfob from outside the vehicle.
Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle
before locking the doors.
The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi-
mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective
distance depends on the conditions around the
vehicle.
As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one
vehicle. For information concerning the purchase
and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
The keyfob will not function when:
●the battery is discharged
●the distance between the vehicle and the
keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m)
The panic alarm will not activate when the
key is in the ignition switch.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the keyfob:
●Do not allow the keyfob, which contains
electrical components, to come into
contact with water or salt water. This
could affect the system function.
●Do not drop the keyfob.
●Do not strike the keyfob sharply against
another object.
●Do not change or modify the keyfob.
●Wetting may damage the keyfob. If the
keyfob gets wet, immediately wipe until
it is completely dry.
●Do not place the keyfob for an extended
period in an area where temperatures
exceed 140°F (60°C).
●Do not attach the keyfob with a key
holder that contains a magnet.
●Do not place the keyfob near equipment
that produces a magnetic field, such as
a TV, audio equipment and personal
computers.
If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-
ommends erasing the ID code of that key-
fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-
authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For
information regarding the erasing proce-
dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
Information Provided by:
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
Locking the doors
1. Remove the ignition key.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Push the LOCK button on the key-
fob.
●All the doors will lock.
●The hazard indicator flashes twice and the
horn beeps once .
NOTE:
An auto-relock function will operate after a
full or partial unlock, when no further user
action occurs. The relock will operate ap-
proximately 1 minute after full or partial
unlock. The auto-relock function is can-
celled when any door is opened or the key
is inserted into the ignition.
Unlocking the doors
1. Press the UNLOCK button on the
keyfob to unlock the drivers door.
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.
3. Press the UNLOCK button again
within 5 seconds to unlock all doors.
LPD2028 LPD2029
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
Releasing the trunk lid
Press the button on the keyfob for longer
than 0.5 seconds to open the trunk lid. The trunk
release button on the keyfob will not operate
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
by pressing and holding the button on the
keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm will stay on for a period of time.
The panic alarm stops when:
●it has run for a period of time, or
●any button is
●pressed on the keyfob.
Using the interior light
Press the button on the keyfob once to
turn on the interior lights.
For additional information, refer to “Interior light”
in the “Instruments and controls” section in this
manual.
LPD2030 LPD2031
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
Information Provided by:
Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-
vated using the keyfob.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash three times to
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds once
more.
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
WARNING
●Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufac-
turer for the possible influences before
use.
●The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and communi-
cation systems. Do not operate the In-
telligent Key while on an airplane. Make
sure the buttons are not operated unin-
tentionally when the unit is stored for a
flight.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the
door locks using the remote controller function or
pushing the request switch on the vehicle without
taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The
operating environment and/or conditions may af-
fect the Intelligent Key system operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key system.
LPD2032
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
●Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
●Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-
ligent Key system transmits weak radio waves.
Environmental conditions may interfere with the
operation of the Intelligent Key system under the
following operating conditions:
●When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting
station.
●When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,
and CB radio.
●When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
covered by metallic materials.
●When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal com-
puter.
●When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-
charged, replace it with a new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-
ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blink
green for about 30 seconds after the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-
nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-
tery life may become shorter.
For information regarding replacement of a bat-
tery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. For information about
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelligent
Key:
●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
●Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
●Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely dry.
●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
●Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
Information Provided by:
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-
gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range from the request switch 䊊
1.
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operat-
ing location, the Intelligent Key operating range
becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may
not function properly.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)
from each request switch 䊊
1.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,
handle or rear bumper, the request switches may
not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the
request switch to lock/unlock the doors.
LPD2073
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
●Do not push the door handle request switch
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
illustrated. The close distance to the door
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-
gent Key is outside the vehicle.
●After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.
●To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
Intelligent Key with you and then lock the
doors.
●Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking
the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door
handle request switch within the range of opera-
tion.
WPD0375 LPD2074
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
Information Provided by:
Locking doors
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position,
place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion and make sure you carry the Intelligent
Key with you.
2. Close all doors.
3. Push any door handle request switch 䊊
1
while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
4. All doors and the trunk will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the outside buzzer sounds twice.
NOTE:
●Doors lock with the door handle request
switch while the ignition switch is not in the
LOCK position.
●Doors do not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch while any door is
open. However, doors lock with the me-
chanical key even if any door is open.
●Doors do not lock with the door handle
request switch with the Intelligent Key inside
the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside
the vehicle, doors can be locked with an-
other Intelligent Key.
CAUTION
●After locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure that the doors
have been securely locked by operating
the door handle or the trunk opener
switch.
●When locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession be-
fore operating the request switch to
prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left in the vehicle.
●The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been de-
tected by the Intelligent Key system.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-
dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection
is equipped with the Intelligent Key.
When the driver’s side door is open, the doors
are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put
inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;
the lock will automatically unlock and the door
buzzer sounds.
LPD2075 WPD0369
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelli-
gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-
ating the request switch to lock the door.
Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or
your other hand.
CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function
under the following conditions:
●When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the rear parcel shelf.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the glove box or a storage bin.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the door pockets.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed on or
under the spare tire area.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side or near metallic materials.
Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the door handle request switch 䊊
1.
3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the
outside buzzer sounds once.
4. Push the door handle request switch 䊊
1
again within 60 seconds to unlock all doors.
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the
doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning
the door handle to its original position will unlock
the door. If the door does not unlock after return-
ing the door handle, push the door handle re-
quest switch to unlock the door.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within
1 minute after pushing the request switch.
●Opening any door.
●Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light timer illuminates for a period of
time when a door is unlocked and the room light
switch is in the DOOR position.
The interior light can be turned off without waiting
by performing one of the following operations.
●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion.
LPD2075 WPD0369
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
Information Provided by:
●Locking the doors with the remote controller.
●Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.
Opening the trunk lid
1. Push the trunk opener request switch 䊊
Afor
more than 1 second while carrying the Intel-
ligent Key with you.
2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound 4
times.
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-
dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is
equipped with the Intelligent Key.
When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is
closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk,
the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will
open.
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all
door locks using the remote keyless function of
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
from the vehicle. The operating distance de-
pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not func-
tion under the following conditions:
●When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
●When the doors or the trunk are open or not
closed securely.
●When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged.
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelli-
gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.
LPD2122
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the button on the Intelligent
Key.
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the horn beeps once.
5. All doors will be locked.
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelli-
gent Key, be sure that the doors have been
securely locked by operating the door
handles.
Unlocking doors
1. Press the button on the Intelligent
Key.
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.
3. Press the button again within 1 min-
ute to unlock all doors.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within
1 minute after pressing the button:
●Opening any doors.
●Pushing the ignition switch.
WPD0359 WPD0360
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
Information Provided by:
The interior light illuminates for a period of time
when a door is unlocked and the room light
switch is in the DOOR position.
The light can be turned off without waiting by
performing one of the following operations:
●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion.
●Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
●Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.
Releasing the trunk lid
Press the button for longer than 0.5 sec-
onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release
button will not operate when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
by pressing and holding the button on the
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a
period of time.
WPD0364 WPD0361
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
The panic alarm stops when:
●It has run for a period of time, or
●Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.
●The request switch on the driver or passen-
ger door has been pushed and the Intelligent
Key is in range of the door handle.
Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-
vated using the Intelligent Key.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds once
more.
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
WPD0362
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
Information Provided by:
䊊
1P (Park) position selecting warning
light
䊊
2NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light
WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE
REMINDERS
The Intelligent Key is equipped with a function
that is designed to minimize improper operations
and to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen.
The warning buzzer sounds and the warning light
illuminates when improper operations are de-
tected.
CAUTION
When the buzzer sounds and the warning
light illuminates, be sure to check both the
vehicle and the Intelligent Key.
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-
pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and
outside the vehicle and a warning light comes on
in the instrument panel.
When a chime or beep sounds or the warning
light comes on, be sure to check the vehicle and
the Intelligent Key.
Audible reminder and warning when
locking the doors
When the chime or buzzer sounds from inside
and outside the vehicle, check for the following:
●The ignition switch is placed in the LOCK
position.
●The Intelligent Key is not left inside the ve-
hicle.
●The shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
Audible reminder and warning when
the engine stops
When the P position selecting warning light
() in the instrument panel blinks in red:
●Make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position.
When the chime sounds intermittently:
●Make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position and the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK position.
If the chime sounds continuously when the driv-
er’s door is opened, check the following:
●The shift lever is placed in the P (Park)
position and the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK position.
●The warning chime may stop when one of
the following is performed:
– Returning the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
– Closing the doors.
LPD2118
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
Alarm and warning when the engine
starts
When the Intelligent Key system warning light
() blinks red and the outside buzzer
sounds, make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the
vehicle.
Warning for low battery power
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-
ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blink
green for about 30 seconds after the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. This warning
is to let you know that the battery of the Intelligent
Key will run down soon. Replace it with a new
one. Refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.
NISSAN recommends replacing the battery at a
NISSAN dealer.
Preventing the Intelligent Key from
being left in the vehicle
If you lock all doors using the power door lock
switch with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle, all of
the doors unlock immediately and the buzzer will
warn you when the door is closed.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
Information Provided by:
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
When pushing the ignition switch to stop
the engine The P (Park) warning light in the instrument
panel illuminates and the inside chime
sounds continuously.
The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Make sure that the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position.
When placing the shift lever in the P (Park)
position The inside warning chime sounds
continuously. The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position. Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is in the ACC position. Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
When pushing the door handle request
switch to lock the door The outside chime sounds for a few
seconds.
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.
When closing the doors
The key warning light in the instrument
panel blinks in yellow, the outside chime
sounds 3 times and the inside warning
chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position. Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The P (Park) warning light in the instrument
panel illuminates and the outside chime
sounds continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF
position and the shift lever is not in the P
(Park) position.
Make sure that the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position and place the ignition switch
in the OFF position.
The outside chime sounds for approximately
3 seconds and all doors unlock. The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle or trunk. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is in the ACC position. Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
When closing the trunk lid The outside chime sounds for approximately
10 seconds and the trunk lid opens. The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
When pushing the ignition switch to start
the engine The key warning light in the instrument
panel blinks in green. The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one. See
“Battery replacement” in the “Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section.
When pushing the LOCK button on the
Intelligent Key to the lock the door The outside chime sounds for a few sec-
onds and all the doors unlock. The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
A door is not closed securely. Close the doors securely.
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊
1located
below the instrument panel until the hood
springs up slightly.
2. Locate the lever 䊊
2in between the hood and
grille and push the lever sideways with your
fingertips.
3. Raise the hood 䊊
3.
4. Remove the support rod 䊊
4and insert it into
the slot marked by an arrow䊊
5.
NOTE:
Do not place the support rod in a location
other than the designated slot.
Hold the coated parts 䊊
Awhen removing or
resetting the support rod. Avoid direct con-
tact with the metal parts, as they may be
hot immediately after the engine has been
stopped.
When closing the hood, return the support rod to
its original position, lower the hood to approxi-
mately 12 in (30 cm) above the latch and release
it. This allows proper engagement of the hood
latch.
WARNING
●Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. Fail-
ure to do so could cause the hood to fly
open and result in an accident.
●If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.
LPD2214
HOOD
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
Information Provided by:
TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH
WARNING
●Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-
haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
●Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
To open the trunk lid, push the opener switch
down.
To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid
down securely.
NOTE:
You can open the trunk lid with the Intelli-
gent Key. Refer to “NISSAN Intelligent
Key®” in this section.
INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are
around cars to prevent them from playing
and becoming locked in the trunk where
they could be seriously injured. Keep the
car locked, with the rear seatback and
trunk lid securely latched when not in use,
and prevent children’s access to car keys.
The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides
a means of escape for children and adults in the
event they become locked inside the trunk.
LPD2119 LPD2081
TRUNK LID
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-
nated release handle until the lock releases and
push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is
made of a material that glows in the dark after a
brief exposure to ambient light.
The handle is located inside the trunk compart-
ment on the interior of the trunk lid.
OPENER OPERATION
The fuel-filler lid release is located below the
instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler lid, pull
the release. To lock, close the fuel-filler lid se-
curely.
FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
●Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain condi-
tions. You could be burned or seriously
injured if it is misused or mishandled.
Always stop the engine and do not
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
near the vehicle when refueling.
●Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling may
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
●Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a
built-in safety valve needed for proper
operation of the fuel system and emis-
sion control system. An incorrect cap
can result in a serious malfunction and
possible injury. It could also cause
the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) to come on.
●Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.
LPD2022
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
Information Provided by:
●Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable fuel
containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are fill-
ing it.
– Use only approved portable fuel con-
tainers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
●Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. For further information see the
“Fuel Recommendation” in the “Techni-
cal and consumer information” section
of this manual.
●The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes-
sage will be displayed if the fuel-filler
cap is not properly tightened. It may
take a few driving trips for the message
to be displayed. Failure to tighten the
fuel-filler cap properly after the LOOSE
FUEL CAP warning message is dis-
played may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
●Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
properly may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
If the light illuminates because
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
tighten or install the cap and continue
to drive the vehicle. The light
should turn off after a few driving trips.
If the light does not turn off after a
few driving trips, have the vehicle in-
spected by a NISSAN dealer.
●For additional information, see the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and Controls” section
in this manual.
●If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to
remove.
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 䊊
1
while refueling.
To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-
filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a
single click is heard.
LPD2125
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
Loose Fuel Cap warning message
The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message dis-
plays in the odometer when the fuel-filler cap is
not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been
refueled. It may take a few driving trips for the
message to be displayed. To turn off the warning
message, perform the following:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as pre-
viously described as soon as possible.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.
3. Press the loose fuel cap warning reset but-
ton 䊊
Ain the meter for about 1 second to
turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning
message 䊊
Bafter tightening the fuel-filler
cap.
TILT OPERATION
Pull the lock lever down 䊊
1and adjust the steer-
ing wheel up or down 䊊
2to the desired position.
Push the lock lever up 䊊
1firmly to lock the
steering wheel in place.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
LPD2124 LPD2123
TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
Information Provided by:
TELESCOPIC OPERATION
Pull the lock lever down 䊊
1and adjust the steer-
ing wheel forward or backward 䊊
3to the desired
position.
Push the lock lever up 䊊
1firmly to lock the
steering wheel in place.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for proper
steering operation and comfort. The driv-
er’s air bag inflates with great force. If you
are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting
sideways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up
against it when it inflates. Always sit back
against the seatback and as far away as
practical from the steering wheel. Always
use the seat belts.
䊊
1To block glare from the front, swing down the
sun visor.
䊊
2To block glare from the side, remove the sun
visor from the center mount and swing the
visor to the side.
䊊
3Slide the extension sun visor in or out as
needed.
CAUTION
●Do not store the sun visor before return-
ing the extension to its original
position.
●Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-
ibly downward.
WPD0315
SUN VISORS
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
VANITY MIRRORS
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity
mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the
mirror cover is open.
CARD HOLDER (driver’s side only)
To access the card holder, pull the sun visor
down and slide card in the card holder. Do not
view information while operating the vehicle.
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The night position 䊊
1reduces glare from the
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
Use the day position 䊊
2when driving in daylight
hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when neces-
sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.
LPD2101 LPD2120 WPD0126
MIRRORS
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
Information Provided by:
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-
cally dims according to the intensity of the head-
lights of the vehicle following you. The automatic
anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
NOTE:
Do not hang any objects over the sensors
䊊
1or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.
Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the
sensors, resulting in improper operation.
The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-
matic anti-glare feature is operating.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
the button as described:
●To turn off the anti-glare feature, press and
hold the button for 3-6 seconds. The
indicator light will turn off.
●To turn on the anti-glare feature, press and
hold the button for 3-6 seconds
again. The indicator light will turn on.
For more information about the compass 䊊
2and
compass features (if so equipped), refer to
“Compass display” in the “Instruments and con-
trols” section of this manual.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror remote control will operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
Move the small switch 䊊
1to select the right or left
mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position
using the large switch 䊊
2.
LPD0446 LPD0237
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
Manual folding outside mirrors
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-
tional information, see “Rear window and outside
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
LPD2112
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31
Information Provided by:
MEMO
3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems
Control panel buttons — color screen with
Navigation System (if so equipped) ..................4-4
How to use the touch-screen ....................4-5
How to use the BACK button ....................4-7
How to use the APPS – i button .................4-7
button ...................................4-9
How to use the ON-OFF button/VOL
(volume) control knob ...........................4-9
How to use the CAMERA button .................4-9
RearView Monitor (if so equipped)..................4-10
How to read the displayed lines .................4-11
Difference between predicted and actual
distances .....................................4-11
Adjusting the screen ...........................4-14
Operating tips.................................4-15
Vents . ..........................................4-16
Heater and Air Conditioner (manual)
(if so equipped) ..................................4-16
Controls......................................4-17
Heater operation ..............................4-18
Air conditioner operation (if so equipped) ........4-19
Air flow charts.................................4-20
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) ..................................4-24
Automatic operation ...........................4-25
Manual operation ..............................4-26
Operating tips.................................4-26
Servicing air conditioner (if so equipped) ............4-27
Audio system ....................................4-27
Radio ........................................4-27
FM radio reception ............................4-28
AM radio reception ............................4-28
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . ......4-28
Audio operation precautions ....................4-29
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player
(if so equipped) ...............................4-36
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player (Type A) (if so equipped) .................4-42
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player (Type B) (if so equipped) .................4-48
USB interface (models without Navigation
System) (if so equipped) .......................4-52
USB interface (models with Navigation
System) ......................................4-54
iPod®* player operation without Navigation
System (if so equipped) ........................4-56
iPod®* player operation with Navigation
System (if so equipped) ........................4-58
Information Provided by:
Bluetooth® streaming audio without
Navigation System (if so equipped) ..............4-61
Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation
System (if so equipped) ........................4-62
Pandora® audio (if so equipped) ................4-63
CD care and cleaning ..........................4-64
Steering wheel switch for audio control (if so
equipped) ....................................4-65
Antenna ......................................4-66
NissanConnect™ App Smartphone Integration (if
so equipped).....................................4-66
Registering with NissanConnect™ App...........4-66
Connect Phone ...............................4-67
Application Download..........................4-67
Car phone or CB radio . . ..........................4-67
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without
Navigation System (Type A) (if so equipped) .........4-68
Regulatory Information .........................4-70
Using the system ..............................4-70
Control buttons ...............................4-72
Getting started ................................4-73
List of voice commands ........................4-75
Voice Adaptation (VA) mode ....................4-79
Manual control ................................4-81
Troubleshooting guide .........................4-82
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without
Navigation System (Type B) (if so equipped). . . ......4-83
Regulatory Information .........................4-84
Using the system ..............................4-85
Control buttons ...............................4-86
Connecting procedure .........................4-87
Voice commands ..............................4-88
Making a call..................................4-89
Receiving a call ...............................4-90
During a call ..................................4-90
Ending a call ..................................4-90
Text messaging................................4-91
Bluetooth® settings ...........................4-92
Manual control ................................4-93
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System (if so equipped) .................4-93
Regulatory Information .........................4-95
Voice commands ..............................4-95
Connecting Procedure .........................4-96
Vehicle phonebook ............................4-96
Making a call..................................4-97
Receiving a call ...............................4-97
Information Provided by:
During a call ..................................4-97
Ending a call ..................................4-97
Text messaging................................4-97
Bluetooth® settings ...........................4-99
Phone settings ...............................4-100
NISSAN Voice Recognition System (if so
equipped) ......................................4-101
Using the system .............................4-101
System features ..............................4-102
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
voice commands .............................4-103
Navigation System voice commands ............4-104
Audio system voice commands.................4-104
Information voice commands...................4-104
My Apps Voice Commands ....................4-104
Help voice commands ........................4-105
Troubleshooting guide ........................4-105
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Positioning of the heating or air condi-
tioning controls and display controls
should not be done while driving in or-
der that full attention may be given to
the driving operation.
●Do not disassemble or modify this sys-
tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
●Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
●In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from it,
stop using the system immediately and
contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ig-
noring such conditions may lead to ac-
cidents, fire or electrical shock.
1. MAP button*
2. Display screen
3. button**
4. button
5. (brightness control) button
6. BACK button
7. ON-OFF button/VOL (volume) control knob
8. CAMERA button
LHA2898
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
9. NAV button*
* For information regarding the Navigation system
control buttons, refer to the separate Navigation
System Owner’s Manual.
** For information regarding the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System control button, see
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with
navigation system” or “Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System without navigation system” in this
section.
When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and the
engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a
key shown only on the display. These keys can be
selected by touching the screen.
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-
SCREEN
CAUTION
●The glass display screen may break if it
is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the
glass screen breaks, do not touch it.
Doing so could result in an injury.
●To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
●Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact
with liquid will cause the system to
malfunction.
To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-
not be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not available
while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-
ate the navigation system.
WARNING
●ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.
●Avoid using vehicle features that could
distract you. If distracted, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause
an accident.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
Information Provided by:
Touch-screen operation
Menu Item Result
Selecting the item Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key 䊊
1on the screen. Touch the “BACK” key to return to
the previous screen.
Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page. Touch the down
arrow to scroll down the page.
Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.
123/ABC Changes the available character set to numbers.
Space Inserts a space.
Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the characters.
OK Completes the character input.
LHA2915
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
Touch-screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-
tergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the
screen.
HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON
Press the BACK button to return to the previous
screen.
HOW TO USE THE APPS – I
BUTTON
For more information about the “SiriusXM Travel
Link”, and “SiriusXM Traffic” features, see the
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
For more information about the “My Apps” key,
see “NissanConnect™ App Smartphone Integra-
tion” in this section.
For more information about the “Voice Com-
mands” key, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition
System” in this section.
LHA2773 LHA2916
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
Information Provided by:
To select and/or adjust several functions, features
and modes that are available for your vehicle:
1. Press the [ ] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the desired item.
Menu item Result
Audio See “Audio system” in this section for more information.
Navigation See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for more information.
Phone & Bluetooth See “Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.
System Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear.
Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.
Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the display.
Display Mode Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes are suited for the re-
spective times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.
Scroll Direction Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.
Clock Touch this key to adjust the time.
Time Format The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.
Date Format Select from five possible formats of displaying the day, month, and year.
Clock Mode Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” allows you to set the
clock using the “Set Clock Manually” key.
Set Clock Manually Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or down. “Clock Mode”
must be set to manual for this option to be available.
Daylight Savings Time Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off.
Time Zone Choose the applicable time zone from the list.
Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.
Camera Touch this key to change the camera settings.
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
Menu item Result
Display Mode Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).
Brightness Adjust touch-screen brightness.
Contrast Adjust touch-screen contrast.
Color Adjust touch-screen color.
Temperature Unit Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).
Touchscreen click Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key on the screen is
touched.
System Beeps Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up message appears on
the screen or a button on the unit (such as the button) is pressed and held for 2 seconds.
Return to Factory Settings/Clear
Memory
Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.
Software Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.
Traffic Touch this key to display traffic settings. See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for more information.
SXM Touch this key to display SXM status information. For SXM setup, refer to “Audio System” in this section.
BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
the button. Pressing the button again will
change the display to the day or the night display.
If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the
display will return to the previous display.
Press and hold the button for more than
two seconds to turn the display off. Press the
button again to turn the display on.
HOW TO USE THE ON-OFF
BUTTON/VOL (volume) CONTROL
KNOB
Press the ON-OFF button to turn audio function
on and off. Turn the volume control knob to adjust
audio volume.
HOW TO USE THE CAMERA
BUTTON
For more information regarding the CAMERA
button, see “REARVIEW MONITOR” in this sec-
tion.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
Information Provided by:
When the shift lever is shifted into the R (Re-
verse) position, the monitor display shows the
view to the rear of the vehicle.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-
tions for proper use of the RearView
Monitor could result in serious injury or
death.
●The RearView Monitor is a convenience
but it is not a substitute for proper back-
ing. Always turn and look out the win-
dows, and check mirrors to be sure that
it is safe to move before operating the
vehicle. Always back up slowly.
●The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in showing large stationary ob-
jects directly behind the vehicle, to help
avoid damaging the vehicle.
●The system cannot completely elimi-
nate blind spots and may not show ev-
ery object.
●Underneath the bumper and the corner
areas of the bumper cannot be viewed
on the RearView Monitor because of its
monitoring range limitation. The system
will not show small objects below the
bumper, and may not show objects
close to the bumper or on the ground.
●Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-
tor differ from actual distance because
a wide-angle lens is used.
●Objects in a RearView Monitor will ap-
pear visually opposite than when
viewed in the rear view and outside
mirrors.
●Make sure that the trunk is securely
closed when backing up.
●Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is in-
stalled above the license plate.
●When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing wa-
ter condensation on the lens, a mal-
function, fire or an electric shock.
●Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-
sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-
function or cause damage resulting in a
fire or an electric shock.
CAUTION
There is a plastic cover over the camera.
Do not scratch the cover when cleaning
dirt or snow from the cover.
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width
and distances to objects with reference to the
vehicle body line 䊊
Aare displayed on the monitor.
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
●Red line 䊊
1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
●Yellow line 䊊
2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)
●Green line 䊊
3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)
●Green line 䊊
4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)
The on-screen guidelines can be set to on or off.
With the shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion:
Press the CAMERA button to toggle the feature
on and off.
With the shift lever in any position other
than the R (Reverse) position:
1. Press the CAMERA button.
2. Touch the “Show Guidelines” key to toggle
the feature on or off.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
PREDICTED AND ACTUAL
DISTANCES
The distance guide line and the vehicle width
guide line should be used as a reference only
when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The
distance viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed objects.
LHA0437 LHA2914
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11
Information Provided by:
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-
tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown closer than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
place 䊊
A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on
the hill is the place 䊊
B. Note that any object on
the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown farther than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
place 䊊
A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on
WHA1504 WHA1505
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
the hill is the place 䊊
B. Note that any object on
the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.
Backing up behind a projecting object
The position 䊊
Cis shown farther than the position
䊊
Bin the display. However, the position 䊊
Cis
actually at the same distance as the position 䊊
A.
The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to
the position 䊊
Aif the object projects over the
actual backing up course.
WHA1506
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
Information Provided by:
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
The procedure for adjusting the quality of the
screen differs depending on the type of screen
present on the vehicle.
For vehicles without Navigation System:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Turn the TUNE-SCROLL knob to highlight
the “Brightness” or “Contrast” key.
3. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
4. Adjust the level using the TUNE-SCROLL
knob and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button to apply the adjustment.
●Do not adjust the Brightness or Contrast of
the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is
moving.
For vehicles with Navigation System:
1. Press the [ ] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “System” key.
4. Touch the “Display” key.
5. Touch the “Brightness” key and adjust the
level to the desired setting.
●Do not adjust the display of the RearView
Monitor while the vehicle is moving.
Without Navigation System
LHA2254
With Navigation System
LHA2892
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
OPERATING TIPS
CAUTION
●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration. To clean the camera,
wipe with a cloth dampened with a di-
luted mild cleaning agent and then wipe
with a dry cloth.
●Do not damage the camera as the moni-
tor screen may be adversely affected.
●When the shift lever is shifted to R (Re-
verse), the monitor screen automatically
changes to the RearView Monitor mode.
However, the radio can be heard.
●It may take some time until the RearView
Monitor is displayed after the shift lever has
been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects may be
distorted momentarily until the RearView
Monitor screen is displayed completely.
When the shift lever is returned to a position
other than R (Reverse), it may take some
time until the screen changes. Objects on
the screen may be distorted until they are
completely displayed.
●When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not clearly display ob-
jects. This is not a malfunction.
●When strong light directly enters the cam-
era, objects may not be displayed clearly.
●Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
●The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light. This is not a malfunction.
●The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-
tor may differ somewhat from those of the
actual object.
●When the contrast of objects is low at night,
pressing the SETTING button or [ ]
button may not change the brightness.
●Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark place or at night.
●If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,
the RearView Monitor may not display ob-
jects. Clean the camera.
●Do not use body wax on the camera window.
If body wax does get on the camera window,
wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-
ened with mild detergent diluted with water.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
Information Provided by:
Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent
slides.
Open or close the vents by using the dial. Move
the dial toward the to open the vents or
toward the to close them.
WARNING
●The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
●
Do not leave children or adults who would
normally require the assistance of others
alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not
be left alone. They could accidentally in-
jure themselves or others through inad-
vertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on
hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to people or animals.
●Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
NOTE:
●Odors from inside and outside the vehicle
can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor
can enter the passenger compartment
through the vents.
●When parking, set the heater and air condi-
tioner controls to turn off air recirculation to
allow fresh air into the passenger compart-
ment. This should help reduce odors inside
the vehicle.
LHA2505
VENTS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (if so equipped)
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
1. Fan speed control / system OFF dial /
air conditioning (A/C) button (if so
equipped)
2. Air flow control buttons
3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/C
button
4. Air recirculation button
5. Rear window defroster button
6. Front windshield defrost button
CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and
controls fan speed.
Air flow control buttons
The air flow control buttons allow you to select
the air flow outlets.
MAX
A/C
— Air flows from center and side
vents with maximum cooling.
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets
and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.
LHA2243
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
Information Provided by:
Air recirculation button
On position (Indicator light on):
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
Press the button to the ON position when:
●driving on a dusty road.
●to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-
senger compartment.
●for maximum cooling when using the air con-
ditioner.
The air recirculation function does not operate
when in the or air flow modes.
Off position (Indicator light off):
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-
ment and distributed through the selected outlet.
Use the off position for normal heater or air con-
ditioner operation.
Air conditioner button (if so
equipped)
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
desired position and press the button to
turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light
comes on when the air conditioner is operating.
To turn off the air conditioner, press the
button again.
The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running.
Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch
For more information about the rear window and
outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch,
see “Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost
outlets and the side vent outlets.
1. Press the button to the OFF position
for normal heating.
2. Press the air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side and
center vents.
1. Press the button to the OFF position.
2. Press the air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to
defrost/defog the windows.
1. Press the defrost/defog button .
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
●To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-
dows, turn the fan control dial to the highest
setting and the temperature control to the
full HOT position.
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
●When the position is selected, the air
conditioner automatically turns on (the indi-
cator light on the button will remain in
Off) if the outside temperature is more than
36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air which
helps defog the windshield. The
mode automatically turns off, allowing out-
side air to be drawn into the passenger
compartment to further improve the defog-
ging performance. The recirculation mode
cannot be activated in the position.
Bi-level heating
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side
and center vents and to the front and rear floor
outlets.
1. Press the button to the OFF position.
2. Press the air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-
shield.
1. Press the air flow control button.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
●When the position is selected, the air
conditioner automatically turns on if the out-
side temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).
The indicator light on the A/C button will
remain in Off. This dehumidifies the air which
helps defog the windshield. The
mode automatically turns off, allowing out-
side air to be drawn into the passenger
compartment to further improve the defog-
ging performance.
Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
improves heater operation.
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (if
so equipped)
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
desired position, and press the button to
activate the air conditioner. When the air condi-
tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions
are added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running.
Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the button to the OFF position.
2. Press the air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
4. Press the button. The indicator light
comes on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
●For quick cooling when the outside tem-
perature is high, push the button to
the ON position. Be sure to return the
to the OFF position for normal cooling. MAX
A/C may be used for quick cooling.
Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the button to the OFF position.
2. Press the air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
Information Provided by:
4. Press the button. The indicator light
comes on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and
dehumidify the air.
1. Press the air flow control button.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
●When the or are selected, the
air conditioner automatically turns on (the
indicator light may not illuminate) if the out-
side temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).
This dehumidifies the air which helps defog
the windshield. The mode automati-
cally turns off, allowing outside air to be
drawn into the passenger compartment to
further improve the defogging performance.
●The air conditioner is always on in
mode, regardless of whether the indicator
light is on or off.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Operating tips
●Keep the windows and moonroof closed
while the air conditioner is in operation.
●After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 min-
utes with the windows open to vent hot air
from the passenger compartment. Then,
close the windows. This allows the air con-
ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
●The air conditioning system should be
operated for approximately 10 minutes
at least once a month. This helps pre-
vent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
●A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
●If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
perature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. See “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and dial
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation
button should always be in the OFF posi-
tion for heating and defrosting.
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
LHA2511 LHA2512
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
Information Provided by:
LHA2513 LHA2514
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
LHA2515
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
Information Provided by:
1. Temperature control buttons (driver’s
side)
2. (front defroster) button
3. (rear window defroster) button
4. Display screen
5. MODE (manual air flow control) button
6. Fresh air intake button
7. Air recirculation button
8. Temperature control buttons (passen-
ger’s side)
9. DUAL button
10. A/C (air conditioner) button
11. (fan speed control) buttons
12. AUTO (automatic) button
13. ON-OFF button
WARNING
●The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
●Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
●Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
Start the engine and operate the controls to
activate the air conditioner.
LHA2518
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
●Odors from inside and outside the vehicle
can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor
can enter the passenger compartment
through the vents.
●When parking, set the heater and air condi-
tioner controls to turn off air recirculation to
allow fresh air into the passenger compart-
ment. This should help reduce odors inside
the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Heating (A/C OFF)
The air conditioner does not activate. When you
need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Press the A/C button. (A/C OFF will be
displayed and A/C indicator will turn off.)
2. Use the temperature control buttons to set
the desired temperature.
●The temperature of the passenger compart-
ment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed are also con-
trolled automatically.
●Do not set the temperature lower than the
outside air temperature or the system may
not work properly.
●Not recommended if windows fog up.
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging
1. Press the front defroster button on.
(The indicator light on the button will remain
in Off.)
2. Use the temperature control buttons to set
the desired temperature.
●To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
windows, use the fan speed control dial to
set the fan speed to maximum.
●As soon as possible after the windshield is
clean, press the AUTO button to return to
the automatic mode.
●When the front defroster button is
pressed, the air conditioner will automati-
cally be turned on at outside temperatures
above 36°F (2°C) (The indicator light may
not illuminate). The air recirculate mode au-
tomatically turns off, allowing outside air to
be drawn into the passenger compartment
to further improve the defogging perfor-
mance.
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
(AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as the
system automatically works to keep a constant
temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed
are also controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on. (The indicator on
the button will illuminate and AUTO will be
displayed.)
2. Use the temperature control buttons to set
the desired temperature.
●Adjust the temperature display to about
75°F (24°C) for normal operation.
●The temperature of the passenger compart-
ment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed are also con-
trolled automatically.
●A visible mist may be seen coming from the
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-
function.
3. You can individually set driver’s and front
passenger’s side temperature using each
set of temperature control buttons. When
the DUAL button or passenger’s side tem-
perature control buttons are pressed, the
DUAL indicator will come on. To turn off the
passenger’s side temperature control, press
the DUAL button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25
Information Provided by:
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
Press the fan control buttons to manually
control the fan speed.
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic
control of the fan speed.
Air recirculation
Press the air recirculation button to recir-
culate interior air inside the vehicle. The
indicator light on the button will come on.
The air recirculation cannot be activated when
the air conditioner is in the front defrosting
mode or the front defrosting and foot out-
let mode.
Fresh air intake
Press the fresh air intake button to draw
outside air into the passenger compartment.
The indicator light on the button will come
on.
Automatic intake air control
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be con-
trolled automatically. To manually control the in-
take air, press the air recirculation button.
To return to the automatic control mode, press
and hold the air recirculation button or
press and hold the fresh air intake button
for about 2 seconds. The indicator lights (both air
recirculation and fresh air intake buttons) will
flash twice, and then the intake air will be con-
trolled automatically.
Air flow control
Pressing the MODE button manually controls air
flow and selects the air outlet:
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster and foot
outlets.
To turn system off
Press the OFF button.
Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch
For more information about the rear window and
outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch,
see “Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
OPERATING TIPS
●When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is
not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-
ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets
will operate normally.
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
The sunload sensor (if so equipped), located on
the top passenger’s side of the instrument panel,
helps the system maintain a constant tempera-
ture. Do not put anything on or around this sen-
sor.
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-
hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-
quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-
tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner
system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant
and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-
mentally friendly” air conditioning system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid per-
sonal injury, any air conditioner service
should be done only by an experienced
technician with proper equipment.
RADIO
With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON posi-
tion, press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knob
to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with
the engine not running, the ignition should be
placed in the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
normally are caused by these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle
may influence radio reception quality.
Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-
dio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-
ity of that reception.
However, there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These char-
acteristics are completely normal in a given re-
ception area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.
LHA2510
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER (if so
equipped)
AUDIO SYSTEM
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
Information Provided by:
Reception conditions will constantly change be-
cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other ve-
hicles can work against ideal reception. De-
scribed below are some of the factors that can
affect your radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-
vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-
nate the noise.
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi
(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM
having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-
nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM
station reception even if the FM station is within
25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
directly related to the distance between the
transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-
of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-
acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect
off objects.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position
(usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter), static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the
treble control to reduce treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The
signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-
mentary flutter or loss of sound.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-
ject to interference as they travel from transmitter
to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
When the satellite radio is used for the first time
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite
radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-
function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite
radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or
large building for satellite radio to receive all of
the necessary data.
No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is
selected unless optional satellite receiver and
antenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio service subscription is active. Satellite ra-
dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Satellite radio performance may be affected if
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio
signal.
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite
antenna.
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can
affect satellite radio performance. Remove the
ice to restore satellite radio reception.
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
Compact disc (CD) player
CAUTION
●Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD player.
●Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or CD
player.
●Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.
●Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
●During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the hu-
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
●The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
●The CD player sometimes cannot func-
tion when the compartment tempera-
ture is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.
●Do not expose the CD to direct sun-
light.
●CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with finger-
prints may not work properly.
●The following CDs may not work prop-
erly:
●Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
●Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
●Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
●Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunc-
tion:
●3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
●CDs that are not round
●CDs with a paper label
●CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
●This audio system can only play pre-
recorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
●If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
LHA0099
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
Information Provided by:
CHECK DISC:
●Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-
rectly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
●Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
PRESS EJECT:
This is an error due to excessive tem-
perature inside the player. Remove the
CD by pressing the EJECT button. After
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD
can be played when the temperature of
the player returns to normal.
UNPLAYABLE:
The file is unplayable in this audio sys-
tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)
CD).
Compact disc with MP3 or WMA
Terms:
●MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the
file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3
compression removes the redundant and
irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the
human ear doesn’t hear.
●WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a
compressed audio format created by Micro-
soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
●Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
●Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
●Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is called
a multisession.
●ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, encoding bit
rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-
mation is displayed on the Artist/song title
line on the display.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are regis-
tered trademarks and trademarks in the United
States of America and other countries of Micro-
soft Corporation of the USA.
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA
files is as illustrated.
●The names of folders not containing MP3 or
WMA files are not shown in the display.
●If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
●The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.
Playback order chart
WHA1078
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31
Information Provided by:
Specification chart:
Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW
Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Supported
versions*1
MP3
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Text character number limitation 128 characters
Displayable character codes*2 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian),
05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure
Cannot play
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for
folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long time
before the music starts
playing.
If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.
Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate
files
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Moves immediately to the
next song when playing
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there
will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
Songs do not play back in
the desired order
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
Information Provided by:
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
Connection Port (if so equipped)
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an acci-
dent or serious injury.
CAUTION
●Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the
USB device is connected correctly into
the USB port.
●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.
●Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device.
USB devices should be purchased separately as
necessary.
This system cannot be used to format USB de-
vices. To format a USB device, use a personal
computer.
In some states/area, the USB device for the front
seats plays only sound without images for regu-
latory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked.
This system supports various USB memory de-
vices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. Some
USB devices may not be supported by this sys-
tem.
●Partitioned USB devices may not play cor-
rectly.
●Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear
properly in the display. Using English lan-
guage characters with a USB device is rec-
ommended.
General notes for USB use:
●Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner
information regarding the proper use and
care of the device.
Notes for iPod® use:
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
●Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause
a checkmark to be displayed on and off
(flickering). Always make sure that the
iPod® is connected properly.
●An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain
in fast forward or rewind mode if it is con-
nected during a seek operation. In this case,
please manually reset the iPod®.
●An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will con-
tinue to fast-forward or rewind if it is discon-
nected during a seek operation.
●An incorrect song title may appear when the
Play Mode is changed while using an iPod®
nano (2nd Generation).
●Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on an iPod®.
●Large video files cause slow responses in an
iPod®. The vehicle center display may mo-
mentarily black out, but will soon recover.
●If an iPod® automatically selects large video
files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle
center display may momentarily black out,
but will soon recover.
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
Bluetooth® streaming audio (if so
equipped)
●Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be
recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
●It is necessary to set up the wireless con-
nection between a compatible Bluetooth®
audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth®
module before using the Bluetooth® audio.
●Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® au-
dio will vary depending on the devices. Make
sure how to operate your audio device be-
fore using it with this system.
●The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped un-
der the following conditions:
●Receiving a call on the Hands-Free
Phone System.
●Checking the connection to the hands-
free phone.
●Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in
an area surrounded by metal or far away from
the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent
tone quality degradation and wireless con-
nection disruption.
●While an audio device is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the device may discharge
quicker than usual.
●This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio
Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Visteon and Bosch.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
Information Provided by:
1. CD eject button
2. CD insert slot
3. SCAN button
4. DISP button
5. RPT/RDM button
6. TUNE/FOLDER knob / MENU button
7. AUX IN jack
8. AUX button
9. CD button
10. AM button
11. FM button
12. VOL (volume) control knob
/(power) button
13. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
14. TRACK button
15. SEEK button
FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-
tion precautions” in this section.
Audio main operation
VOL (volume) knob / (power) button:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the VOL (volume) knob
/(power) button while the system is off to
call up the mode that was playing immediately
before the system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the VOL (volume)
knob / (power) button.
Turn the VOL (volume) knob / (power) but-
ton to adjust the volume.
LHA8804
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
MENU button
Audio
Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.
Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Speed Sensitive Vol. Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to
“OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
AUX IN Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxilary device volume. A setting of 0 provides no additional boost in
volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.
Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the MENU button until the desired mode appears in the display. Press the SEEK or
TRACK button to adjust the setting to the desired level (-5 to +5). Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the MENU
button repeatedly until the radio or CD display reappears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
Information Provided by:
DISP (display) button:
Press the DISP (display) button while a CD is
playing to change the text shown in the audio
display as follows:
For CDs:
Running Time →Album Title: →Artist Name: →
Song Title
For MP3 CDs:
Running Time →Folder Title: →Album Title: →
Artist Name: →Song Title:
If the text information is too long to fully be dis-
played on the screen; press and hold the DISP
button for longer than 1.5 seconds to scroll
through the rest of the text.
Press the DISP (display) button while the radio is
playing to toggle the audio display between sta-
tion number and RDS.
Clock operation
To turn the clock display on or off, press the
MENU button repeatedly until “Clock” appears
on the display. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to
toggle the setting (ON or OFF).
Clock set
1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until
“Adjust Clock” appears on the display.
2. Press the ENTER button.
3. “Change Hour” will appear on the screen.
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the
hours and then press ENTER.
4. “Change Minute” will appear on the screen.
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the
minutes and then press ENTER.
The display will return to the regular clock display
after 10 seconds if no further adjustment is per-
formed.
FM/AM radio operation
AM and FM buttons:
Press the AM button to change the band to AM.
If another audio source is playing when the AM
button is pressed, the audio source playing will
automatically be turned off and the last radio
station played will begin playing.
Press the FM button to change the band as
follows:
FM1 →FM2 →FM1
If another audio source is playing when the FM
button is pressed, the audio source playing will
automatically be turned off and the last radio
station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (ST) illuminates during
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
signal is weak, the radio automatically changes
from stereo to monaural reception.
SEEK and TRACK (tuning)
buttons:
Press the SEEK button to tune from low to
high frequencies and stop at the next broadcast-
ing station.
Press the TRACK button to tune from high
to low frequencies and stop at the next broad-
casting station.
Press and hold either button to seek at a faster
speed.
SCAN (tuning) button:
Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the
display window. Scan tuning begins from low to
high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 sec-
onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-
cient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN
blinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN button
again during this 5 second period stops scan
tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for
FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the AM or FM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until a beep sound is heard.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and carefully insert the compact disc
into the slot with the label side up. The compact
disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts
to play.
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD button:
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns
off and the last used compact disc starts to play.
SEEK and TRACK
(Fast Forward, Rewind)
buttons:
When the SEEK button or TRACK
button is pressed while the compact disc is play-
ing, the compact disc plays at an increased
speed while fast forwarding or rewinding. When
the button is released, the compact disc returns
to normal play speed.
SEEK and TRACK
buttons:
When the SEEK button is pressed while
the compact disc is playing, the next track follow-
ing the present one starts to play from the begin-
ning. Press the SEEK button several times
to skip several tracks. Each time the button is
pressed, the CD advances one additional track.
The track number appears in the display window.
(When the last track on the compact disc is
skipped, the first track is played.)
When the TRACK button is pressed, the
track being played returns to the beginning.
Press the TRACK button several times to
skip back several tracks. Each time the button is
pressed the CD moves back one track.
RPT/RDM button:
Press the RPT/RDM button while a compact disc
is playing to change the play pattern as follows:
CD:
TRACK REPEAT →DISC RANDOM →DISC
REPEAT
MP3/WMA CD:
FOLDER REPEAT →TRACK REPEAT →DISC
RANDOM →FOLDER RANDOM →DISC RE-
PEAT
TRACK REPEAT: The track that is currently play-
ing will be repeated.
DISC RANDOM: The order of the tracks on the
disc will be mixed during play.
DISC REPEAT: The disc currently playing will be
repeated.
FOLDER REPEAT: The tracks in the current
folder will be repeated.
FOLDER RANDOM: The order of the tracks in
the folder will be mixed during play.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39
Information Provided by:
SCAN (CDs) button:
Press the SCAN button for less than 1.5 seconds
to scan all tracks of the current disc for 10 sec-
onds per track. The SCAN icon is flashed during
scan mode.
The scan mode is canceled once it scans through
all tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN button is
pressed during scan mode.
CD EJECT:
When the button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected.
When the button is pressed while the
compact disc is playing, the compact disc will
eject and the system will turn off.
AUX (Auxiliary) button:
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard
analog audio input such as from a portable cas-
sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop com-
puters.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.
Press the MENU button repeatedly until “AUX IN
Volume” appears on the screen to control the
incoming volume level of the auxiliary input de-
vice. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the
level between 0 and +3.
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
1. CD eject button
2. XM button*
3. CD insert slot
4. Display screen
5. SEEK button
6. SCAN button
7. CAT button
8. BACK button
9. iPod MENU button
10.TUNE/SCROLL knob, ENTER/SETTING
button
11.AUX IN jack
12.Station select (1 - 6) buttons
13.RDM button
14.RPT button
15.DISP button
16.VOL (volume) knob / PWR (power)
button
17.CD•AUX button
18.FM•AM button
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the XM button is pressed to access
satellite radio stations unless optional
satellite receiver and antenna are installed
and an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service
subscription is active. Satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
LHA2501
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41
Information Provided by:
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type
A) (if so equipped)
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-
tion precautions” in this section.
Audio main operation
VOL (volume) knob / PWR (power) button:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the VOL (volume) knob / PWR
(power) button while the system is off to call up
the mode that was playing immediately before the
system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the VOL (volume)
knob / PWR (power) button.
Turn the VOL (volume) knob / PWR (power)
button to adjust the volume.
ENTER/SETTING button:
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show the
Settings screen on the display. Turn the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the options
and then press the ENTER/SETTING button to
make a selection.
Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade
Increase or decrease the level of bass, treble,
balance or fade. Balance controls the level of
sound between the left and right speakers. Fade
controls the level of sound between the front and
rear speakers.
Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume)
Speed Sensitive Volume adjusts the volume of
the audio system as the vehicle’s driving speed
changes. The feature can be turned off or set to a
level of 1 to 5. Level 5 represents the highest
degree of volume adjustment.
AUX Vol.
Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the
boost of the incoming auxiliary device volume. A
setting of 0 provides no additional boost in vol-
ume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost
in volume.
LHA2257 LHA2258
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
Brightness and Contrast
Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the
appearance of the display screen.
Clock Adjust
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to highlight
the hours or minutes and then use the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the value. Press
the ENTER/SETTING button again to set the
value.
On-Screen Clock
Select “ON” or “OFF” to control whether or not
the clock is shown in the upper right corner of the
display screen.
RDS Display
Select “ON” or “OFF” to control whether or not
RDS information is displayed on the screen while
the radio is playing.
Language Select
Select the desired language for the system. Eng-
lish, Spanish and French are the available lan-
guages.
iPod® MENU button
This button can only be used for iPod® opera-
tions. See “iPod® player operation without Navi-
gation System” later in this section for details
about the function of this button.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM·AM button:
Press the FM·AM button to change the band as
follows:
AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-
ing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on
the screen during FM stereo reception. When the
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-
matically changes from stereo to monaural re-
ception.
XM band select:
Pressing the XM button will change the band as
follows:
XM1* →XM2* →XM3*→XM1* (satellite, if so
equipped)
LHA2906
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43
Information Provided by:
When the XM button is pressed while the ignition
switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will
come on at the last station played.
The last station played will also come on when
the ON-OFF/VOL control knob is pressed.
*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite
radio mode will be skipped unless an optional
satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscription is
active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska,
Hawaii and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the XM button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.
While the radio is in XM mode, the operation can
be controlled through the touch-screen. Touch
the “Channels” key to display a list of channels.
Touch a channel displayed on the list to change
to that channel. Touch the “Categories” key to
display a list of categories. Touch a category
displayed on the list to display options within that
category.
TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning):
Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or right
for manual tuning.
SEEK tuning:
Press the SEEK button or to tune
from low to high or high to low frequencies and to
stop at the next broadcasting station.
SCAN tuning:
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-
casting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear
on the screen while the radio is scan tuning.
Pressing the button again during this 5 second
period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will
remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is
not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning
moves to the next station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve
stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6
for FM2). Eighteen channels can be set for the
satellite radio (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button, or choose
the satellite band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using
the XM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until the preset number is updated on the
display and the sound is briefly muted.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD·AUX button:
With a CD loaded, press the CD·AUX button until
the CD mode is displayed on the screen.
CD/MP3 display mode:
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text
may be displayed on the screen if the CD has
been encoded with text information. Depending
on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, informa-
tion such as Artist, Song and Folder will be dis-
played.
The track number and the total number of tracks
in the current folder or on the current disc are
displayed on the screen as well.
4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) button:
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT button
or for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc
is playing to reverse or fast forward the track
being played. The compact disc plays at an in-
creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.
When the button is released, the compact disc
returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CAT button:
Press the SEEK/CAT button while a CD or
MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the begin-
ning of the current track. Press the SEEK/CAT
button several times to skip backward sev-
eral tracks.
Press the SEEK/CAT button while a CD or
MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.
Press the SEEK/CAT button several times
to skip forward several tracks. If the last track on
a CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is
played. If the last track in a folder of an
MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the
next folder is played.
TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only):
If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-
ing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to change
folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a
folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a
folder.
RPT button:
When the RPT button is pressed while a com-
pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-
peated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re-
peated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-
cator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
RDM button:
When the RDM button is pressed while a com-
pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
1 Disc Random ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Disc Random →1 Folder Random →OFF
1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
CD•AUX button:
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard
analog audio input such as from a portable cas-
sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop
computer.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45
Information Provided by:
Press the CD•AUX button to play a compatible
device plugged into the AUX IN jack. The
CD•AUX button is also used to switch the audio
system to a source plugged into the USB input
jack in the center console. When a device is
plugged into the AUX IN jack while another de-
vice is plugged into the USB input jack, the
CD•AUX button is used to toggle between the
two functions.
For more information about the USB input jack,
see “USB interface (models without Navigation
System)” in this section.
EJECT button:
When the button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and
the last source will be played.
When the button is pressed twice with a
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc
is not removed within 20 seconds, the disc will
reload.
Additional features
For more information about the iPod® player
available with this system, see “iPod® player
operation without Navigation System” in this sec-
tion.
For more information about the USB interface
available with this system, see “USB interface
(models without Navigation System)” in this sec-
tion.
For more information about the Pandora® audio
feature available with this system, see “Pan-
dora® audio” in this section.
4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
1. CD eject button
2. FM-AM button
3. AUX button
4. CD insert slot
5. Backward seek button and
Forward seek button
6. BACK button
7. TUNE knob / AUDIO button
8. Display screen
9. ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control
knob
10.CD button
11.SXM button*
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the SXM button is pressed to ac-
cess satellite radio stations unless op-
tional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
service subscription is active. Satellite
radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
LHA2895
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47
Information Provided by:
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type
B) (if so equipped)
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-
tion precautions” in this section.
Audio main operation
ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control
knob:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the ON-OFF button while the
system is off to call up the mode (radio, CD, AUX,
Bluetooth® audio USB or iPod®) that was play-
ing immediately before the system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the ON-OFF button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the
volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-
sitive Volume. When this feature is active, the
audio volume changes as the driving speed
changes.
Audio settings:
1. Press the [ ] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Audio” key.
Use the touch-screen to adjust the following
items to the desired setting:
Audio
Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.
Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Speed Sensitive Vol. Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the ve-
hicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to
vehicle speed.
AUX Volume Level Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Available options are
Low (Quiet), Medium, and High (Loud).
Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the AUDIO control knob and turning it to select the item to adjust. When the desired item
is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the AUDIO button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not
pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.
4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
SXM settings:
To view the SXM settings:
1. Press the [ ] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “SXM” key.
The signal strength, activation status and other
information are displayed on the screen.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM·AM button:
Press the FM·AM button to change the band as
follows:
AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-
ing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (ST) is shown on the
screen during FM stereo reception. When the
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-
matically changes from stereo to monaural re-
ception.
SXM band select:
Pressing the SXM button will change the band as
follows:
SXM1* →SXM2* →SXM3*→SXM1* (satellite,
if so equipped)
When the SXM button is pressed while the igni-
tion switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the last station played.
The last station played will also come on when
the ON-OFF/VOL control knob is pressed.
*When the SXM button is pressed, the satellite
radio mode will be skipped unless an optional
satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscription is
active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska,
Hawaii and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the SXM button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.
While the radio is in SXM mode, the operation
can be controlled through the touch-screen.
Touch the “Channels” key to display a list of
channels. Touch a channel displayed on the list to
change to that channel. Touch the “Categories”
key to display a list of categories. Touch a cat-
egory displayed on the list to display options
within that category.
Tuning with the touch-screen:
When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be tuned
using the touch-screen. To bring up the visual tuner,
touch the “Tune” key on the lower right corner of the
screen. A screen appears with a bar running from
low frequencies on the left to high frequencies on
the right. Touch the screen at the location of the
frequency you wish to tune and the station will
change to that frequency. To return to the regular
radio display screen, touch the “OK” key.
Tuning with the TUNE/SCROLL knob:
The radio can also be manually tuned using the
TUNE/SCROLL knob. When in FM or AM mode,
turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left for lower
frequencies or to the right for higher frequencies.
When in SXM mode, turn the TUNE/SCROLL
knob to change the channel.
SEEK tuning:
When in FM or AM mode, press the seek
buttons or to tune from low to high
or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next
broadcasting station.
When in SXM mode, press the seek
buttons or to change the category.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49
Information Provided by:
1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for
FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band. Twelve stations can be set for the
SXM band (6 for SXM1, 6 for SXM2).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button or choose
the radio band SXM1, SXM2 using the SXM
button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual or
seek tuning. Touch and hold any of the de-
sired station memory keys (1 – 6) until a
beep sound is heard.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other keys can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Presets can also be selected by touching the
desired preset number on the screen.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD button:
When the CD button is pressed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the compact disc
will start to play.
LHA2899
4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
CD/MP3 display mode
Menu item
CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded with text is
being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is displayed listing the artist,
album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when a CD is playing:
Random
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Ran-
dom” or alternates between Random Folder, and Random All. This text will appear on the display. To cancel
Random mode, touch the “Random” key until the key is no longer highlighted.
Repeat
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Repeat”
alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This text will appear on the
display. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer highlighted
Browse
Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the list to begin
playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list the folders on the disc. Fol-
low the procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose a folder.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51
Information Provided by:
SEEK (Reverse or Fast
Forward) buttons:
Press and hold the seek buttons or
for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing
to reverse or fast forward the track being played.
The compact disc plays at an increased speed
while reversing or fast forwarding. When the but-
ton is released, the compact disc returns to nor-
mal play speed.
SEEK buttons:
Press the seek button while a CD or
MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the begin-
ning of the current track. Press the seek
button several times to skip backward sev-
eral tracks.
Press the seek button while a CD or
MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.
Press the seek button several times to skip
forward several tracks. If the last track on a CD is
skipped, the first track on the disc is played. If the
last track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.
AUX button:
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any stan-
dard analog audio input such as from a portable
cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop
computer. Press the AUX button to play a com-
patible device plugged into the AUX IN jack.
EJECT button:
When the button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and
the last source will be played.
If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds, the
disc will reload.
Additional features
For more information about the iPod® player
available with this system, see “iPod® player
operation with Navigation System” in this section.
For more information about the USB interface
available with this system, see “USB interface
(models with Navigation System)” in this section.
For more information about the Bluetooth® audio
interface available with this system, see
“Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation
System” in this section.
USB INTERFACE (models without
Navigation System) (if so equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB input
jack
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an acci-
dent or serious injury.
LHA2507
4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
●Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the
USB device is connected correctly into
the USB port.
●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.
●Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-
mation regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
The USB input jack is located in the center con-
sole. Insert the USB device into the jack 䊊
1.
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the jack, compatible audio files on the stor-
age device can be played through the vehicle’s
audio system.
Audio file operation
AUX button:
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX button to switch to
the USB input mode. If a CD is playing or another
audio source is plugged in through the AUX IN
jack, the AUX button toggles between the three
sources.
Play information:
Information about the audio files being played
can be displayed on the display screen of the
vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the
audio files are encoded, information such as
Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed.
The track number and number of total tracks in
the folder are displayed on the screen as well.
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) buttons:
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons
or for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on
the USB device is playing to reverse or fast
forward the track being played. The track plays at
an increased speed while reversing or fast for-
warding. When the button is released, the audio
file returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CAT buttons:
Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-
dio file on the USB device is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press the
SEEK/CAT button several times to skip
backward several tracks.
Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-
dio file on the USB device is playing to advance
one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button
several times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track in a folder on the USB device is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.
RDM button:
When the RDM button is pressed while an audio
file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
All Random →1 Folder Random →OFF
All Random: all tracks on the USB device will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53
Information Provided by:
The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
RPT button:
When the RPT button is pressed while an audio
file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-
peated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re-
peated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-
cator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
TUNE/SCROLL knob:
If there are multiple folders with audio files on the
USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip
back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip
ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio
files on the USB device, turning the
TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will re-
turn to the first track on the USB device.
USB INTERFACE (models with
Navigation System)
Connecting a device to the USB input
jack
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an acci-
dent or serious injury.
LHA2507 LHA1378
4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
●Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the
USB device is connected correctly into
the USB port.
●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.
●Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-
mation regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
The USB input jack is located in the center con-
sole. Insert the USB device into the jack 䊊
1.
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the jack, compatible audio files on the stor-
age device can be played through the vehicle’s
audio system.
Audio file operation
AUX button:
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX button to switch to
the USB input mode. If another audio source is
playing and a USB memory device is inserted,
press the AUX button until the center display
changes to the USB memory mode.
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL
control knob to restart the USB memory.
Play information:
Information about the audio files being played is
shown on the display screen of the vehicle’s
audio system. Touch “Browse” to display the list
of categories that can be used to narrow the
search. Touch the name of a song on the screen
to begin playing that song.
Seeking buttons:
Press the button while an audio file on the
USB device is playing to return to the beginning
of the current track. Press the button sev-
eral times to skip backward several tracks.
LHA2923
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55
Information Provided by:
Press the button while an audio file on the
USB device is playing to advance one track.
Press the button several times to skip for-
ward several tracks. If the last track in a folder on
the USB device is skipped, the first track of the
next folder is played.
Random and repeat play mode:
While files on a USB device are playing, the play
pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated
or played randomly.
Random:
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play
pattern to the USB device. To cancel Random
mode, touch the “Random” key again.
Repeat:
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play
pattern to the USB device. To cancel Repeat
mode, touch the “Repeat” key again.
iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an acci-
dent or serious injury.
CAUTION
●Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the
USB device is connected correctly into
the USB port.
●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.
●Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-
mation regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the
iPod® can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB jack
located in the center console 䊊
1. Connect the
iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod®
and the USB end of the cable to the USB jack on
the vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via a
USB connection, its battery will be charged while
connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch
in the ACC or ON position.
LHA2507
4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® may
only be able to be operated by the vehicle audio
controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, re-
move the USB end of the cable from the USB
jack on the vehicle, then remove the cable from
the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
●iPod® 5th Generation (firmware version 1.3
or later)
●iPod® Classic (80GB) (firmware version
1.1.2PC or later)
●iPod® Classic (120GB) (firmware version
2.0.1PC or later)
●iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.3.1 or later)
●iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.1.3 or later)
●iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.1.3PC or later)
●iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.0PC or later)
●iPod® nano - 5th generation (8GB) (firm-
ware version 1.0.2PC or later)
●iPod® nano - 5th generation (16GB) (firm-
ware version 1.0.1PC or later)
●iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firm-
ware version 1.2PC or later)
●iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firm-
ware version 1.1PC or later)
●iPod® Touch - 1st generation (firmware ver-
sion 2.2.1 or later)
●iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware
version 2.2.1 or later)
●iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware ver-
sion 3.1.3 or later)
●iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware ver-
sion 4.3.5 or later)
●iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.1 or later)
●iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 4.3 or later)
●iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.0 or later)
●iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
●iPad® (firmware version 4.3.2 or later)
●iPad® 2 (firmware version 4.3.3 or later)
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.
Audio main operation
Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position. Then, press the CD·AUX or iPod®
MENU button repeatedly to switch to the iPod®
mode.
If the audio system is turned off while the iPod® is
playing, the iPod® plays when the audio system
is turned back on.
If the audio system is off, pressing the CD·AUX or
iPod® MENU button turns the audio system on
and plays the iPod®.
If the audio system is on, the audio system auto-
matically begins playing tracks from the iPod®
when it is plugged into the jack.
iPod® MENU button:
Press the iPod® MENU button while the iPod®
is connected to show the iPod® operation menu
on the audio display. Scroll through the menu list
using the TUNE·SCROLL control dial. Press EN-
TER to select a menu item. Items in the iPod®
menu appear on the display in the following or-
der:
●Now playing
●Playlists
●Artists
●Albums
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57
Information Provided by:
●Songs
●Podcasts
●Genres
●Composers
●Audiobooks
●Shuffle songs
For more information about each item, see the
iPod® Owner’s Manual.
SEEK/CAT buttons:
Press the SEEK/CAT buttons or to
skip backward or forward one track.
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons
or for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing
to reverse or fast forward the track being played.
The track plays at an increased speed while
reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is
released, the track returns to normal play speed.
REPEAT (RPT):
When the RPT button is pressed while a track is
being played, the play pattern can be changed as
follows:
Repeat Off →1 Track Repeat →All Repeat →
Repeat Off
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-
peated.
All Repeat: all songs in the current list are re-
peated.
Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is applied.
RANDOM (RDM):
When the RDM button is pressed while a track is
being played, the play pattern can be changed as
follows:
Shuffle Off →Track Shuffle →Album Shuffle →
Shuffle Off
Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list will be
played randomly.
Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list will
be played randomly.
Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is applied.
BACK button:
When the BACK button is pressed, it returns to
the previous menu.
iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an acci-
dent or serious injury.
LHA2506
4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
●Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the
USB device is connected correctly into
the USB port.
●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.
●Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-
mation regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the
iPod® can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB jack
located in the center console 䊊
1. Connect the
iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod®
and the USB end of the cable to the USB jack on
the vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via a
USB connection, its battery will be charged while
connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch
in the ACC or ON position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® may
only be able to be operated by the vehicle audio
controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, re-
move the USB end of the cable from the USB
jack on the vehicle, then remove the cable from
the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
●iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.3.0 or later)
●iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware ver-
sion 2.0.1 or later)
●iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware ver-
sion 2.0.4 or later)
●iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware ver-
sion 4.2.1 or later)*
●iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware ver-
sion 5.1 or later)
●iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware ver-
sion 5.1 or later)
●iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.3.1 or later)
●iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.1.3 or later)
●iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.1.3 or later)
●iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.0.4 or later)
●iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.0.2 or later)
●iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware ver-
sion 1.1 or later)
●iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)
●iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)
●iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
●iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
* Some features of this iPod® may not be fully
functional.
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59
Information Provided by:
Audio main operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Press the AUX button repeatedly to
switch to the iPod® mode.
If the system has been turned off while the iPod®
was playing, pressing the VOL/ON·OFF control
knob will start the iPod®.
AUX button:
When the AUX button is pressed with the system
off and the iPod® connected, the system will turn
on. If another audio source is playing and the iPod®
is connected, press the AUX button repeatedly until
the center display changes to the iPod® mode.
Interface:
The interface for iPod® operation shown on the
vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to
the iPod® interface. Use the touch-screen,
BACK button or the scrolling knob to navigate
the menus on the screen.
When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu” key
to bring up the iPod® interface.
Depending on the iPod® model, the following
items may be available on the menu list screen.
For further information about each item, see the
iPod® Owner’s Manual.
●Playlists
●Artists
●Albums
●Genres
●Songs
●Composers
●Audiobooks
●Podcasts
Shuffle and repeat play mode:
While the iPod® is playing, the play pattern can
be altered so that songs are repeated or played
randomly.
Shuffle:
Touch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random play
pattern to the iPod®. When the Shuffle mode is
active, the text is highlighted. To cancel Shuffle
mode, touch the “Shuffle” key again until the text
is no longer highlighted.
Repeat:
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play
pattern to the iPod®. When the repeat mode is
active, the text is highlighted. To cancel Repeat
mode, touch the “Repeat” key again until the text
is no longer highlighted.
LHA2911 LHA2907
4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
Seek buttons:
Press the seek button or to skip
backward or forward one track.
Press and hold the seek button or
for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing to reverse
or fast forward the track being played. The track
plays at an increased speed while reversing or
fast forwarding. When the button is released, the
track returns to normal play speed.
Scrolling menus:
While navigating long lists of artists, albums or
songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll
the list by the first character in the name. To
activate character indexing, touch the “A-Z”key in
the upper right corner of the screen. Turn the
TUNE knob to choose the number or letter to
jump to in the list and then press the AUDIO
button.
BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio de-
vice that is capable of playing audio files, the
device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio
system so that the audio files on the device play
through the vehicle’s speakers.
Connecting Bluetooth® audio
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the button. The system an-
nounces the available commands.
2. Say “Connect Phone”. The system acknowl-
edges the command and announces the
next set of available commands.
3. Say “Add Phone”. The system acknowl-
edges the command and asks you to initiate
connecting from the phone handset. The
connecting procedure of the cellular phone
varies according to each cellular phone
model. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-
tions on connecting NISSAN recommended
cellular phones.
LHA2279
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61
Information Provided by:
4. When prompted for a Passkey code, enter
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and
cannot be changed.
Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press
the AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth®
audio mode is displayed on the screen.
Use the vehicle audio controls or the Bluetooth®
device’s controls to play, pause, skip or reverse
tracks.
BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio de-
vice that is capable of playing audio files, the
device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio
system so that the audio files on the device play
through the vehicle’s speakers.
Connecting Bluetooth® audio
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the [ ] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.
5. The system acknowledges the command
and asks you to initiate connecting from the
phone handset. The connecting procedure
of the cellular phone varies according to
each cellular phone model. See the cellular
phone Owner’s Manual for details. You can
also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for
instructions on connecting NISSAN recom-
mended cellular phones.
LHA2773 LHA2844
4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press
the AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth®
audio mode is displayed on the screen.
The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are dis-
played on the screen.
PANDORA® AUDIO (if so equipped)
The vehicle’s audio system is capable of playing
audio streaming through a compatible, USB-
connected audio device using the Pandora® mu-
sic service.
Connecting a device for use with
Pandora® audio
Devices capable of streaming Pandora® audio
can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system
via the USB input jack. The USB input jack is
located in the center console.
Launch the Pandora® application on the phone
and then connect with the USB jack. Once con-
nected, the Pandora® controls will be displayed
on the control panel display screen.
Compatibility
The following iPhone® models are compatible
with the system:
●iPhone® 3GS
●iPhone® 4
●iPhone® 4S
●iPhone® 5
The latest Pandora® application should be in-
stalled on the phone.
Audio main operation
Models without Navigation System:
To switch to the Pandora® audio mode, press
the AUX button repeatedly until the Pandora®
audio mode is displayed on the screen.
The controls for the Pandora® audio mode are
displayed on the screen. Press the audio preset 3
button to pause or play the music.
Press the audio preset 5 button to select “ ”
(thumbs up). Press the audio preset 4 button to
select “ ” (thumbs down).
Models without Navigation System
LHA2283
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
There is a limit of six skips per station per
hour. If a “ ” (thumbs down) is given
after the skip limit has been reached, the
current track will continue to play but the
feedback will be saved.
CD CARE AND CLEANING
●Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
●Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
●To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
●Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.
●A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
LHA0049
4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
1. Tuning switch
2. Power on and SOURCE select switch
3. Volume control button
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)
The audio system can be operated using the
controls on the steering wheel.
POWER on switch
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi-
tion, push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio
system on.
SOURCE select switch
Push the source select switch to change the
mode in the following sequence:
AM →FM1 →FM2 →XM1 (satellite radio, if so
equipped) →XM2 (satellite radio, if so equipped)
→XM3 (satellite radio, if so equipped) →CD* →
USB/iPod®* (if so equipped) →Bluetooth® Au-
dio* →AUX* →AM.
* These modes are only available when compat-
ible media storage is inserted into the device or
connected to the system.
Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch to increase or
decrease the volume.
Tuning switch
While the display is showing a map or audio
screen, tilt the Tuning switch upward or down-
ward to select a station, track, CD or folder. For
most audio sources, tilting the switch up/down
for more than 1.5 seconds provides a different
function than a tilting up/down for less than
1.5 seconds.
AM and FM:
●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
seek up or down to the next station.
XM/SXM (if so equipped):
●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
go to the next or previous category.
iPod® (if so equipped):
●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
fast forward or rewind the current track.
CD:
●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the folder number (if
playing compressed audio files) or to fast
forward or rewind the current track.
LHA2498
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65
Information Provided by:
USB (if so equipped):
●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
fast forward or rewind the current track.
Bluetooth® Audio (if so equipped):
●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
skip ahead or back to the next song.
●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
reverse or fast forward the current track.
Pandora® Audio (if so equipped):
●Tilt up for less than 1.5 seconds to input
“thumbs up” for the current song.
●Tilt down for less than 1.5 seconds to input
“thumbs down” for the current song.
●Tilt up for more than 1.5 seconds to skip to
the next song (if the maximum of six skips per
station per hour has not been exceeded).
ANTENNA
Window antenna
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear
window.
CAUTION
●Do not place metalized film near the
rear window glass or attach any metal
parts to it. This may cause poor recep-
tion or noise.
●When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a
dampened soft cloth.
This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone Inte-
gration technology. This allows many compatible
Smartphone applications to be displayed and
easily controlled through the vehicle’s touch-
screen.
NOTE:
A compatible smartphone and registration
is required to use mobile applications or to
access connected features of certain ve-
hicle applications.
REGISTERING WITH
NISSANCONNECT™ APP
To use the Smartphone Integration feature, it is
necessary for the user to register. In order to
register, visit the NissanConnect™ website,
www.nissanusa.com/connect/ and sign up or
create an account through the prompts on the
NissanConnect™ App. Once registered, down-
load the NissanConnect™ App from your com-
patible phone’s application download source and
then log into the application. If you already have
an account created through the App, please log
in.
NISSANCONNECT™ APP
SMARTPHONE INTEGRATION (if so
equipped)
4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
CONNECT PHONE
To use this feature, a compatible smartphone
must be connected via Bluetooth® or USB to the
vehicle. For more information on connecting your
phone, see “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-
tem with Navigation System” in this section.
NOTE:
For Apple iPhones, NissanConnect™ Apps
REQUIRES the phone to be plugged in via
USB.
NOTE:
For Android phones, NissanConnect™ Apps
REQUIRES the phone to be paired via
Bluetooth.
APPLICATION DOWNLOAD
Once connected, the NissanConnect™ App will
search your phone to determine which compat-
ible applications are currently installed. The user
will then choose which apps they want to bring
into their vehicle from the list of apps within the
“Manage My Apps” section of the NissanCon-
nect™ App on their smartphone. The vehicle will
then download the in-vehicle interface for each of
these compatible applications. Once down-
loaded, the user can access their selected smart-
phone applications through the vehicle touch-
screen. For more information on application
availability see www.nissanusa.com/connect/
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
your vehicle, be sure to observe the following
precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may
adversely affect the engine control system and
other electronic parts.
WARNING
●A cellular phone should not be used for
any purpose while driving so full atten-
tion may be given to vehicle operation.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of
cellular phones while driving.
●If you must make a call while your ve-
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-
lar phone operational mode is highly
recommended. Exercise extreme cau-
tion at all times so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
●If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
●Keep the antenna as far away as pos-
sible from the electronic control
modules.
●Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic control
system harnesses. Do not route the an-
tenna wire next to any harness.
●Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
●Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
●For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
●If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped)
4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-
patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-
necting procedure is required. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the previously connected
cellular phone turned on and carried in the ve-
hicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If
your phone does not connect automatically
to the system, consult the phone’s Owner’s
Manual for details on device operation.
You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth®
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
●Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the hands-free
phone system.
●Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized or work properly.
Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
for a recommended phone list and connect-
ing instructions.
LHA2912
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69
Information Provided by:
●You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
vice area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-
tainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
●When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-
ing a call.
●Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
●While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.
●If the hands-free phone system seems to be
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”
in this section. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help.
●Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
ing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
●Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
quirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Visteon.
USING THE SYSTEM
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Phone
System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. If the button is
pressed before the initialization completes, the
system will announce “Hands-free phone system
not ready” and will not react to voice commands.
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system, observe the following:
●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
●Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
●Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.
●Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press and
release the button located on the steering
wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a command.
The command given is picked up by the micro-
phone, and voice feedback is given when the
command is accepted.
●If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.
●If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please try again.” Make sure the command is
said exactly as prompted by the system and
repeat the command in a clear voice.
●
If you want to go back to the previous com-
mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correction”
any time the system is waiting for a response.
●You can cancel a command when the sys-
tem is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can
also press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to
end the VR session. Whenever the VR ses-
sion is cancelled, a double beep is played to
indicate you have exited the system.
●If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, press the volume control switches
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob.
How to say numbers
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer
to the following rules and examples.
●Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh
oh”, or
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh
oh”
●Words can be used for the first 4 digits
places only.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”,
– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty
two hundred,” and
– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two
hundred”
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71
Information Provided by:
●Numbers can be spoken in small groups.
The system will prompt you to continue en-
tering digits, if desired.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight zero zero”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
– “Six six two”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
– “Six two zero zero”
●Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-
able when using the “Special Number” com-
mand and the “Send” command during a
call).
See “List of voice commands” and “Special
number” in this section for more information.
Example: 1-555-1212 *123
– “One five five five one two one two star
one two three”
●Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using
the “Special Number” command).
●Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available
only when storing a phonebook number).
NOTE:
For best results, say phone numbers as
single digits.
The voice command “Help” is available at any
time. Please use the “Help” command to get
information on how to use the system.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice feed-
back to speak the next command by pressing
the button on the steering wheel. After
interrupting the system, wait for a beep before
speaking your command.
One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example, press
the button and after the tone say, “Call
Redial”.
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System are located on the steering wheel.
PHONE/SEND
Press the button to initiate a
VR session or answer an incoming
call.
You can also use the button to
interrupt the system feedback and
give a command at once. See “List of
voice commands” and “During a call”
in this section for more information.
LHA2499
4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
PHONE/END
While the Voice Recognition system
is active, press and hold the
button for 5 seconds to quit the
Voice Recognition system at any
time.
Tuning switch
While using the Voice Recognition
system, tilt the tuning switch up or
down to manually control the phone
system.
GETTING STARTED
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-
ditional command options, refer to “List of voice
commands” in this section.
Choosing a language
You can interact with the Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System using English, Spanish or
French.
To change the language, perform the following.
1. Press and hold the button for more
than 5 seconds.
2. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the
hands-free phone system to enter the voice
adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END
() button to select a different lan-
guage.”
3. Press the button.
For information on voice adaptation, see
“Voice Adaptation (VA) mode” in this sec-
tion.
4. The system announces the current language
and gives you the option to change the lan-
guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in
French). To select the current language,
press the PHONE/SEND ( ) button. To
select a different language, tilt the tuning
switch ( or ) up or down.
NOTE:
You must press the button within
5 seconds to change the language.
5. If you decide not to change the language, do
not press either button. After 5 seconds, the
VR session will end, and the language will
not be changed.
Connecting procedure
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be cancelled.
Main Menu
“Connect phone” 䊊
A
“Add phone” 䊊
B
Initiate from handset 䊊
C
Name phone 䊊
D
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel. The system announces the available
commands.
2. Say: “Connect phone” 䊊
A. The system ac-
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73
Information Provided by:
3. Say: “Add phone” 䊊
B. The system acknowl-
edges the command and asks you to initiate
connecting from the phone handset 䊊
C.
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. See the cellular phone Own-
er’s Manual for details. You can also visit
www.NissanUSA.com/bluetooth for in-
structions on connecting NISSAN recom-
mended cellular phones.
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and
cannot be changed.
4. The system asks you to say a name for the
phone 䊊
D.
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for a
name again.
Also, if more than one phone is connected
and the name sounds too much like a name
already used, the system tells you, then
prompts you for a name again.
Making a call by entering a phone
number
Main Menu
“Call” 䊊
A
“Phone Number” 䊊
B
Speak the digits 䊊
C
“Dial” 䊊
D
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel. A tone will sound.
2. Say: “Call” 䊊
A. The system acknowledges
the command and announces the next set of
available commands.
3. Say “Phone Number” 䊊
B. The system ac-
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
4. Say the number you wish to call starting with
the area code in single digit format 䊊
C.Ifthe
system has trouble recognizing the correct
phone number, try entering the number in
the following groups: 3-digit area code,
3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-
ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five
five five” as the 1st group, then “one two
one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five
four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than
10 digits or any special characters, say
“Special Number”. See “How to say num-
bers” in this section for more information.
5. When you have finished speaking the phone
number, the system repeats it back and an-
nounces the available commands.
6. Say: “Dial” 䊊
D. The system acknowledges
the command and makes the call.
For additional command options, see “List of
voice commands” in this section.
Receiving a call
When you hear the ring tone, press the
button on the steering wheel.
Once the call has ended, press the button
on the steering wheel.
NOTE:
If you do not wish to take the call when you
hear the ring tone, press the button
on the steering wheel.
For additional command options, see “List of
voice commands” in this section.
4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
Main Menu
“Call”
“Phonebook”
“Recent Calls”
“Connect Phone”
When you press and release the button on
the steering wheel, you can choose from the
commands on the Main Menu. The following
pages describe these commands and the com-
mands in each sub-menu.
Remember to wait for the tone before
speaking.
After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hear
the list of commands currently available any time
the system is waiting for a response.
If you want to end an action without completing it,
you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the
system is waiting for a response. The system will
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is
cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate
you have exited the system.
If you want to go back to the previous command,
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time
the system is waiting for a response.
“Call”
Main Menu
“Call”
(Speak name) 䊊
A
“Phone Number”
(Speak Digits) 䊊
B
“Special Number” 䊊
C
“Redial” 䊊
D
“Call Back” 䊊
E
(Speak name) 䊊
A
If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you
can dial a number associated with a name.
See “Phonebook” in this section to learn how to
store entries.
When prompted by the system, say the name of
the phone book entry you wish to call. The system
acknowledges the name.
If there are multiple numbers associated with the
name, the system asks you to choose the correct
number.
Once you have confirmed the name and location,
the system begins the call.
(Speak Digits) 䊊
B
When prompted by the system, say the number
you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”
and “Making a call by entering a phone number”
in this section for more details.
“Special Number” 䊊
C
For dialing more than 10 digits or any special
characters, say “Special Number”. When the
system acknowledges the command, the system
will prompt you to speak the number.
“Redial” 䊊
D
Use the Redial command to call the last number
that was dialed.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
If a redial number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to redial” and
ends the VR session.
“Call Back” 䊊
E
Use the Call Back command to dial the number of
the last incoming call within the vehicle.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75
Information Provided by:
If a call back number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to call back” and
ends the VR session.
During a call
During a call there are several command options
available. Press the button on the steering
wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-
mands.
●“Help” — The system announces the avail-
able commands.
●“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns
to the call.
●“Send” — Use the Send command to enter
numbers, “*” or “#” during a call. For ex-
ample, if you were directed to dial an exten-
sion by an automated system:
Say: “Send one two three four.”
The system acknowledges the command
and sends the tones associated with the
numbers. The system then ends the VR ses-
sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,
Say “pound” for “#”.
●“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-
mand to transfer the call from the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to
the cellular phone when privacy is desired.
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call
transferred to privacy mode.” The system
then ends the VR session.
To reconnect the call from the cellular phone
to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free System,
press the button.
●“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute
your voice so the other party cannot hear it.
Use the mute command again to unmute
your voice.
NOTE:
If a call is ended or the cellular phone
network connection is lost while the Mute
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset
to “off” for the next call so the other party
can hear your voice.
“Phonebook” (phones without
automatic phonebook download
function)
NOTE:
The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-
able when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Phonebook”
“Transfer Entry” 䊊
A
“Delete Entry” 䊊
B
“List Names” 䊊
C
For phones that do not support automatic down-
load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth® pro-
file), the “Phonebook” command is used to manu-
ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook.
The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each
phone connected to the system.
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
“Transfer Entry” 䊊
A
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
When prompted by the system, say the name you
would like to give the new entry.
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
you for a name again.
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
Enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”
See “How to say numbers” in this section for
more information.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer
from the phone handset. The new contact phone
number will be transferred from the cellular
phone via the Bluetooth® communication link.
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
recommended cellular phones.
The system repeats the number and prompts you
for the next command. When you have finished
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
“Store.”
The system confirms the name, location and
number.
“Delete Entry” 䊊
B
Use the Delete Entry command to erase one
entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-
ognizes the command, speak the name to delete
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
“List Names” 䊊
C
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names in the phonebook.
The system recites the phonebook entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
by pressing the button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the VR session.
“Phonebook” (phones with automatic
phonebook download function)
NOTE:
The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-
able when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Phonebook”
SayaName
“List Names” 䊊
A
“Record Name” 䊊
B
For phones that support automatic download of
the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth® profile), the
“Phonebook” command is used to manage en-
tries in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the
name of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of
that entry.
The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for
each phone connected to the system.
When a phone is connected to the system, the
phonebook is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. This feature allows you to access your
phonebook from the Bluetooth® system and call
contacts by name. You can record a custom
voice tag for contact names that the system has
difficulty recognizing. For more information see
“Record name” in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
“List Names” 䊊
A
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names and locations in the phone book.
The system recites the phone book entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
by pressing the button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the
“Record name” command in this section for infor-
mation about recording custom voice tags for list
entries that the system has difficulty pronounc-
ing.
“Record Name” 䊊
B
The system allows you to record custom voice
tags for contact names in the phonebook that the
vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can
also be used to record voice tags to directly dial
an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice
tags can be recorded to the system.
“Recent Calls”
Main Menu
“Recent Calls”
“Outgoing” 䊊
A
“Incoming” 䊊
B
“Missed” 䊊
C
“Call Back” 䊊
D
“Redial” 䊊
E
Use the Recent Calls command to access out-
going, incoming, missed calls and to call back the
last incoming call or to redial the last outgoing
call.
“Outgoing” 䊊
A
Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing
calls made from the vehicle.
“Incoming” 䊊
B
Use the Incoming command to list the incoming
calls made to the vehicle.
“Missed” 䊊
C
Use the Missed command to list the calls made to
the vehicle that were not answered.
“Call Back” 䊊
D
Use the Call Back command to dial the number of
the last incoming call to the vehicle.
“Redial” 䊊
E
Use the Redial command to dial the number of
the last outgoing call from the vehicle.
“Connect Phone”
NOTE:
The Add Phone command is not available
when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Connect Phone”
“Add Phone” 䊊
A
“Select Phone” 䊊
B
“Delete Phone” 䊊
C
“Replace Phone” 䊊
D
“Bluetooth OFF” 䊊
E
“Phonebook Download OFF” 䊊
F
“Display Settings” 䊊
G
Use the Connect Phone commands to manage
the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable
the Bluetooth® function on the vehicle.
4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
“Add Phone” 䊊
A
Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to
the vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” in this
section for more information.
“Select Phone” 䊊
B
Use the Select Phone command to select from a
list of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys-
tem will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
select. Only one phone can be active at a time.
“Delete Phone” 䊊
C
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a
phone that is connected to the vehicle. The sys-
tem will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also
delete the phonebook for that phone.
“Replace Phone” 䊊
D
Use the Replace Phone command to replace an
existing phone pairing with a new phone. The
system will keep all voice tags assigned to your
phonebook.
“Bluetooth OFF” 䊊
E
Use the Bluetooth OFF command to prevent a
wireless connection to your phone.
“Phonebook Download OFF” 䊊
F
Use the Phonebook Download OFF command to
turn off the automatic downloading of the hand-
set phonebook to the available (if supported by
the cellular phone). When the command is rec-
ognized, “Sync Contacts OFF” will appear on the
audio display.
To turn the feature back on, say “Phonebook
Download”. When the command is recognized,
“Sync Contacts ON” will appear on the audio
display.
“Display Settings” 䊊
G
Use the Display Settings command to control
where incoming call notifications are displayed in
the vehicle. Say “Driver Only” to have call notifi-
cations shown on the vehicle information display
only. Say “Both” to have call notifications shown
on both the vehicle information display and the
center audio display.
To turn the feature back on, say “Phonebook
Download”. When the command is recognized,
“Sync Contacts ON” will appear on the audio
display.
VOICE ADAPTATION (VA) MODE
Voice Adaptation allows up to two out-of-dialect
users to train the system to improve recognition
accuracy. By repeating a number of commands,
the users can create a voice model of their own
voice that is stored in the system. The system is
capable of storing a different voice adaptation
model for each connected phone.
Training procedure
The procedure for training a voice is as follows.
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet
outdoor location.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-
ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-
sion in P (Park).
3. Press and hold the button for more
than 5 seconds.
4. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the
hands-free phone system to enter the voice
adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END
() button to select a different lan-
guage.”
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79
Information Provided by:
5. Press the button.
For information on selecting a different lan-
guage, see “Choosing a language” in this
section.
6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected
automatically. If both memory locations are
already in use, the system will prompt you to
overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-
vided by the system.
7. When preparation is complete and you are
ready to begin, press the button.
8. The VA mode will be explained. Follow the
instructions provided by the system.
9. When training is finished, the system will tell
you an adequate number of phrases have
been recorded.
10. The system will announce that voice adap-
tation has been completed and the system is
ready.
The VA mode will stop if:
●The button is pressed for more than
5 seconds in VA mode.
●The vehicle begins moving during VA mode.
●The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
LOCK position.
Training phrases
During the VA mode, the system instructs the
trainer to say the following phrases. (The system
will prompt you for each phrase.)
●phonebook transfer entry
●dial three oh four two nine
●delete call back number
●incoming
●transfer entry
●eight pause nine three two pause seven
●delete all entries
●call seven two four zero nine
●phonebook delete entry
●next entry
●dial star two one seven oh
●yes
●no
●select
●missed
●dial eight five six nine two
●Bluetooth on
●outgoing
●call three one nine oh two
●nine seven pause pause three oh eight
●cancel
●call back number
●call star two zero nine five
●delete phone
●dial eight three zero five one
●record name
●four three pause two nine pause zero
●delete redial number
●phonebook list names
●call eight oh five four one
●correction
●connect phone
●dial seven four oh one eight
●previous entry
●delete
●dial nine seven two six six
●call seven six three oh one
●go back
●call five six two eight zero
●dial six six four three seven
4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
MANUAL CONTROL
While using the voice recognition system, it is
possible to select menu options by using the
steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice
commands. This can be especially helpful if the
noise of driving makes it difficult for the voice
recognition system to accurately interpret com-
mands. The manual control mode does not allow
dialing a phone number by digits. The user may
select an entry from the Phonebook or Recent
Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition, exit
the manual control mode by pressing and holding
the PHONE/END ( ) button. At that time,
pressing the PHONE/SEND ( ) button will
start the Hands Free Phone System.
Operating tips
●To enter manual control mode, start the
voice recognition system and tilt the tuning
() switch up or down. The system will
speak ⬙Showing Manual Options⬙when
manual controls are initially activated.
●To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning
() switch up or down. The system will
always speak the current menu option. De-
pending on the audio display, it will also
show the current menu option.
●To select the current menu option, press the
PHONE/SEND ( ) button.
●To go back to the previous menu, press the
PHONE/END ( ) button. If the current
menu is the Main Menu, pressing the
PHONE/END ( ) button will exit the
Phone system.
●To exit the manual control mode, press and
hold the PHONE/END ( ) button for
5 seconds.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81
Information Provided by:
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until
the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-
prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Voice Adaptation (VA) mode” in this section.
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the
phone book.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
using the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook” in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
●If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-
patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-
necting procedure is required. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
LHA2910
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (Type B) (if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83
Information Provided by:
phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the previously connected
cellular phone turned on and carried in the ve-
hicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If
your phone does not connect automatic
ally to the system, consult the phone’s
Owner’s Manual for details on device op-
eration.
You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth®
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
●Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the hands-free
phone system.
●Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized or work properly.
Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
for a recommended phone list and connect-
ing instructions.
●You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
vice area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-
tainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
●When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-
ing a call.
●Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
●While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.
●If the hands-free phone system seems to be
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”
in this section. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help.
●Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
ing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
●Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.
4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
quirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Visteon.
USING THE SYSTEM
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Phone
System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. If the button is
pressed before the initialization completes, the
system will announce “Hands-free phone system
not ready” and will not react to voice commands.
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system, observe the following:
●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
●Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
●Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.
●Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
and release the button located on the
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a
command.
The command given is picked up by the micro-
phone, and voice feedback is given when the
command is accepted.
●If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.
●If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please try again.” Make sure the command is
said exactly as prompted by the system and
repeat the command in a clear voice.
●If you want to go back to the previous com-
mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-
tion” any time the system is waiting for a
response.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85
Information Provided by:
●You can cancel a command when the sys-
tem is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can
also press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to
end the VR session. Whenever the VR ses-
sion is cancelled, a double beep is played to
indicate you have exited the system.
●If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, press the volume control switches
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice feed-
back to speak the next command by pressing
the button on the steering wheel. After
interrupting the system, wait for a beep before
speaking your command.
One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example, press
the button and after the tone say, “Call
Redial”.
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.
PHONE/SEND
Press the button to initiate
a VR session or answer an incom-
ing call.
You can also use the button
to interrupt the system feedback
and give a command at once. See
“List of voice commands” and
“During a call” in this section for
more information.
PHONE/END
While the voice recognition sys-
tem is active, press and hold
the button for 5 seconds to
quit the voice recognition system
at any time.
Tuning switch
While using the voice recognition
system, tilt the tuning switch up or
down to manually control the
phone system.
LHA2499
4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
CONNECTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be cancelled.
To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System:
1. Press the SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/FOLDER knob to select
“Bluetooth” and then press the ENTER
button.
Menu Item Result
Bluetooth ON/OFF Allows user to switch Bluetooth on and off. Bluetooth must be turned on in order to connect device.
On Turns Bluetooth functionality on
Off Turns Bluetooth functionality off
Add Phone or Device Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. operate the Bluetooth phone to enter the PIN and complete the con-
nection process.
Replace Phone Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voicetags that were recorded using the previ-
ous phone if vehicle is equipped with voice recognition.
The connecting procedure varies according to each phone. See the phone’s Owner’s Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or call the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on connecting recommended cellular phones.
LHA2775
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87
Information Provided by:
VOICE COMMANDS
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Press
the button and say “Phone” to bring up the
phone command menu. The available options
are:
●Call
●Phonebook
●Recent Calls
●Send Text
●Read Text
●Select Phone
“Call”
For more information on the “Call” command, see
“Making a call” in this section.
“Phonebook”
The following commands are available under
“Phonebook”:
●(a name)
Say a name in the phonebook to bring up a
list of options for that phonebook entry. The
system will say the name it interpreted based
on the voice command provided. If the name
is incorrect, say “Correction” to hear another
name.
Once the correct phonebook entry is identi-
fied, say “Dial” to dial the number or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that number.
Say “Record Name” to record a name for the
phonebook entry. Say “Delete Recording” to
delete a recorded name for the phonebook
entry.
●List Names
Speak this command to have the system list
the names in the phonebook one by one
alphabetically. Say “Dial” to dial the number
of the current name or “Send Text” to send a
text message to that number. Say “Next En-
try” or “Previous Entry” to move through the
list alphabetically. Say “Record Name” to
record a name for the current phonebook
entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a
recorded name for the current phonebook
entry.
●Transfer Entry
This command can be used to transfer mul-
tiple contacts at a time. To enable manual
contact transfer capability, set “Phonebook
Download” to “Off” in the Setting menu. The
ability to transfer contacts via the OPP
Bluetooth profile depends on your mobile
phone. See your phone’s Owner’s Manual
for details and instructions.
●Delete Entry
Speak this command to delete an entry in
the phonebook. Choose an entry to delete
by speaking the desired name or say “List
Names”.
“Recent Calls”
The following commands are available under
“Recent Calls”:
●Incoming Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the name
will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone
number of the incoming call will be dis-
played.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
to send a text message to that number. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of incoming calls.
4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
●Missed Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is from
an entry in the phonebook, the name will be
displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of
the missed call will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
to send a text message to that number. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of missed calls.
●Outgoing Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call
was to an entry in the phonebook, the name
will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone
number of the outgoing call will be dis-
played.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
to send a text message to that number. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of outgoing calls.
●Redial
Speak this command to call the last number
dialed.
●Call Back
Speak this command to call the number of
the last incoming call to the vehicle.
“Send Text / Read Text”
For more information on these commands, see
“Text messaging” in this section.
“Select Phone”
Speak this command to select a phone to use
from a list of those phones connected to the
vehicle.
MAKING A CALL
To make a call from a phone connected to the
vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-
tem:
NOTE:
Available commands different if system is
in Manual Control mode. See “Manual Con-
trol” in this section for more information.
1. Press the button.
2. The system will prompt you for a command.
Say “Call”.
3. Select one of the available voice commands
to continue:
●“(a name)” — Speak the name of a phone-
book entry to place a call to that entry. The
system will respond with the name it inter-
preted from your command and will prompt
you to confirm that the name is correct. Say
“Yes” to initiate the call or “No” to hear an-
other name from the phonebook.
●“List Names” – Speak this command to have
the system list the names in the phonebook
one by one alphabetically. Say “Next Entry”
or “Previous Entry” to move through the list
alphabetically. Say “Select” once desired
contact is heard and displayed on screen.
Say “Dial” to dial the number of the current
name or say “Record Name” to record a
name for the current phonebook entry to be
assigned.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89
Information Provided by:
●“Phone Number” — Speak this command to
place a call by inputting numbers. For 7– to
10–digit phone number, speak the numbers.
Say “Correction” at any time in the process
to correct a misspoken or misinterpreted
number. For phone numbers with more dig-
its or special characters, say “Special Num-
ber”, then speak the digits. Up to 24 digits
can be entered. Available special characters
are “start”, “pound”, “plus”, and “pause”.
When finished, say “Dial” to initiate the call.
Say “Correction” at any time in the process
to correct a misspoken or misinterpreted
number or character.
●“Redial” – Speak this command to dial the
number of the last outgoing call. The system
will display “Re-dialing <name/number>”.
The name of the phonebook entry will be
displayed if it available, otherwise the num-
ber being re-dialed will be displayed.
●“Call Back” – Speak this command to dial
the number of the last incoming call. The
system will display “Calling back
<name/number>”. The name of the phone-
book entry will be displayed if it available,
otherwise the number being called back will
be displayed.
RECEIVING A CALL
When a call is received by the phone connected
to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, the call information is displayed on either
the vehicle information display or both the vehicle
information display and he control panel display.
Press the button to accept the call. Press
the button to reject the call.
DURING A CALL
While a call is active, press the button to
access additional options. Speak one of the fol-
lowing commands:
●“(numbers)” – Speak numbers and then say
“Send” or say “Correction” to change the
numbers entered.
●“Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the com-
mand to mute or unmute the system.
●“Transfer Call” – Speak this command to
transfer the call to the handset. To transfer
the call back from the handset to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System,
press the button and confirm when
prompted.
If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System allows for call waiting
functionality. If a call is received while another call
is already active, a message will be displayed on
the screen. Press the button to hold the
active call and switch to the second call. Press
the button to reject the second call.
While the second call is active, pressing
the button will allow the same commands
that available during any call as well as two addi-
tional commands:
●“Switch Call” – Speak this command to hold
the second call and switch back to the origi-
nal call.
●“End Other Call” – Speak this command to
stay with the second call and end the original
call.
Press the button to accept the call. Press
the button to reject the call.
ENDING A CALL
To end an active call, press the button.
4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
TEXT MESSAGING
WARNING
●Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict
the use of some of the applications and
features, such as social networking and
texting.
●Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict
the use of “Text-to-Speech”. Check lo-
cal regulations before using this
feature.
●Use the text messaging feature after
stopping your vehicle in a safe location.
If you have to use the feature while
driving, exercise extreme caution at all
times so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
●If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while using the text
messaging feature, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
NOTE:
This feature is automatically disabled if the
connected device does not support the
Message Access Profile (MAP). See the
phone’s Owner’s Manual for details and
instructions.
The system allows for the sending and receiving
of text messages through the vehicle interface.
Sending a text message:
1. Press the button.
2. Say “Send Text”.
3. The system will provide a list of available
commands in order to determine the recipi-
ent of the text message. Choose from the
following:
●(a name)
●Number
●Incoming Calls
●Outgoing Calls
●Missed Calls
For more information about these options,
see “Voice commands” in this section.
4. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send. Five
predefined messages are available as well
as three custom messages. To choose one
of the predefined messages, speak one of
the following:
●“Driving, can’t text”
●“Call me”
●“On my way”
●“Running late”
●“Okay”
To send one of the custom messages, say
“Custom Message”. If more than one cus-
tom message is stored, the system will
prompt for the number of the desired cus-
tom message. For more information on set-
ting and managing custom text messages,
see “Bluetooth® settings” in this section.
Reading a received text message:
1. Press the button.
2. Say “Read Text”.
The text message, sender and delivery time are
shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch on
the steering wheel to scroll through all text mes-
sages if more than one are available. Press
the button to exit the text message screen.
Press the button to access the following
options for replying to the text message:
●Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender of
the text message using the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91
Information Provided by:
●Send Text
Speak this command to send a text message
response to the sender of the text message.
●Read Text
Speak this command to read the text mes-
sage again.
●Previous Text
Speak this command to move to the previ-
ous text message (if available).
●Next Text
Speak this command to move to the next text
message (if available).
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
To access and adjust the settings for the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:
1. Press the SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Bluetooth” and then press the ENTER but-
ton:
●Bluetooth
Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® system on or off.
●Add Phone or Device
To connect a phone to the system, see
“Connecting procedure” in this section.
●Delete Phone or Device
Select to delete a phone from the displayed
list. The system will ask to confirm before
deleting the phone.
●Replace Phone
Select to replace a phone from the displayed
list. When a selection is made, the system
will ask to confirm before proceeding. The
recorded phonebook for the phone being
deleted will be saved as long as the new
phone’s phonebook is the same as the old
phone’s phonebook.
●Select Phone or Device
Select to connect to a previously connected
phone from the displayed list.
●Show Incoming Calls
Select “Driver Only” to have incoming call
information displayed only in the vehicle in-
formation display. Select “Both” to have in-
coming call information displayed in both the
vehicle information display and the center
display screen.
●Phonebook Download
Select to turn on or off the automatic down-
load of a connected phone’s phonebook.
●Text Message
Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text
messaging feature.
LHA2274
4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
●New Text Sound
Select to adjust the volume of the sound that
plays when a new text is received by a phone
connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System. The setting all the way to the
left indicates that the new text sound will be
muted.
●Show Incoming Text
Select “Driver Only” to have incoming text
messages displayed only in the vehicle infor-
mation display. Select “Both” to have incom-
ing text messages displayed in both the ve-
hicle information display and the center
display screen. Select “None” to have no
display of incoming text messages.
●Edit Custom Messages
Select to set a custom message that will be
available with the standard options when
sending a text message. To set a custom
message, send a text message to your own
phone number while the phone is connected
to the system. Three custom messages can
be set. Custom messages can only be set
while the vehicle is stationary.
●Auto Reply
Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply func-
tion. When enabled, the vehicle will auto-
matically send a predefined text message to
the sender when a text message is received
while driving.
●Auto Reply Message
Select to choose the message that is sent
when the Auto Reply function is enabled.
Choose from “I’m Driving” or one of the three
custom messages stored in the system.
●Vehicle Signature On/Off
Select to choose whether or not the vehicle
signature is added to outgoing text mes-
sages from the vehicle. This message can-
not be changed or customized.
MANUAL CONTROL
While using the Voice Recognition system, it is
possible to select menu options by using the
steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice
commands. The manual control mode does not
allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user
may select an entry from the Phonebook or Re-
cent Calls lists. To re-activate Voice Recognition,
exit the manual control mode by pressing and
holding the PHONE/END ( ) button. At that
time, pressing the PHONE/SEND ( ) button
will start the Hands Free Phone System.
WARNING
●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
●If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93
Information Provided by:
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-
patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-
necting procedure is required. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the connected cellular
phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth®
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the
phone commands, so dialing a phone number
using your voice is possible. For more details, see
“NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this sec-
tion.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
●Set up the wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module before using the hands-free phone
system.
●Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone module. Please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list and connecting.
●You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
vice area.
LHA2909
4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive cellular signal; such as
in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-
tainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
●When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-
ing a call.
●Immediately after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, it may be impos-
sible to receive a call for a short period of
time.
●Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
●While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.
●If the hands-free phone system seems to be
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”
in this section. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help.
●Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
ing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
●Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
●The signal strength display on the monitor
will not coincide with the signal strength
display of some cellular phones.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
quirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Bosch.
VOICE COMMANDS
You can use voice commands to operate various
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For
more details, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition
System” in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95
Information Provided by:
Voice Prompt Interrupt
While using the voice recognition system, the
system voice can be interrupted to allow the user
to speak commands. While the system is speak-
ing, press the button on the steering
wheel. The system voice will stop and a tone will
be heard. After the tone, speak desired command
(displayed on the touch-screen).
One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example, press
the button and after the tone say, “Call
Redial”. CONNECTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be cancelled.
1. Press the [ ] button on the control
panel.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.
5. Initiate the connecting process from the
handset. The system will display the mes-
sage: “Is PIN XXXXXX displayed on your
Bluetooth device?”. If the PIN is displayed
on your Bluetooth® device, select “Yes” to
complete the pairing process.
For more information, see the Bluetooth® de-
vice’s Owner’s Manual.
VEHICLE PHONEBOOK
To access the vehicle phonebook:
1. Press the button on the control panel.
2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.
3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed
list.
4. The number of the entry will be displayed on
the screen. Touch the number to initiate di-
aling.
NOTE:
To scroll quickly through the list, touch the
“A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the
screen. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
choose a letter or number and then press
ENTER. The list will move to the first entry
that begins with that number or letter.
LHA2773
4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
MAKING A CALL
To make a call, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the button on the control panel.
The “Phone” screen will appear on the dis-
play.
2. Select one of the following options to make a
call:
●“Phonebook”: Select the name from an entry
stored in the vehicle phonebook.
●“Call Lists”: Select the name from the in-
coming, outgoing or missed.
●“Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from the
vehicle.
●“”: Input the phone number manually
using a keypad displayed on the screen. For
information on how to use the touch-screen,
see “How to use the touch-screen” in this
section.
RECEIVING A CALL
When a call is placed to the connected phone,
the display will change to phone mode.
To accept the incoming call, either:
●Press the button on the steering
wheel, or
●Touch the green phone icon on the screen.
To reject the incoming call, either:
●Press the button on the steering
wheel, or
●Touch the red phone icon on the screen.
DURING A CALL
While a call is active, the following options are
available on the screen:
●“Handset”
Select this option to switch control of the
phone call over to the handset.
●“Mute Mic.”
Select this option to mute the microphone.
Select again to unmute the microphone.
●Red phone ( ) icon
Select to end the phone call.
ENDING A CALL
To end a phone call, select the red phone ( )
icon on the screen or press the button on
the steering wheel.
TEXT MESSAGING
WARNING
●Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict
the use of some of the applications and
features, such as social networking and
texting. Check local regulations for any
requirements.
●Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict
the use of “Text-to-Speech”. Check lo-
cal regulations before using this
feature.
●Use the text messaging feature after
stopping your vehicle in a safe location.
If you have to use the feature while
driving, exercise extreme caution at all
times so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
●If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while using the text
messaging feature, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
The system allows for the sending and receiving
of text messages through the vehicle interface.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97
Information Provided by:
Sending a text message:
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.
4. The system will provide a list of available
commands in order to determine the recipi-
ent of the text message. Choose from the
following:
●To (a name)
●Enter Number
●Missed Calls
●Incoming Calls
●Outgoing Calls
For more information about these options,
see “Voice commands” in this section.
5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send. Nine
predefined messages are available as well
as three custom messages. To choose one
of the predefined messages, speak one of
the following after the tone:
●“Driving, can’t text”
●“Call me”
●“On my way”
●“Running late”
●“Okay”
●“Yes”
●“No”
●“Where are you?”
●“When?”
To send one of the custom messages, say
“Custom Messages”. If more than one cus-
tom message is stored, the system will
prompt for the number of the desired cus-
tom message. For more information on set-
ting and managing custom text messages,
see “Bluetooth® settings” in this section.
Reading a received text message:
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.
The text message, sender and delivery time are
shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to
scroll through all text messages if more than one
are available. Press the button to exit the
text message screen. Press the button to
access the following options for replying to the
text message:
●Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender of
the text message using the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System.
●Send Text
Speak this command to send a text message
response to the sender of the text message.
●Read Text
Speak this command to read the text mes-
sage again.
●Previous Text
Speak this command to move to the previ-
ous text message (if available).
●Next Text
Speak this command to move to the next text
message (if available).
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Press the [ ] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
Menu Item Result
Phone Settings See “Phone settings” in this section for more information.
Connect New Device Touch to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Select Connected Device Touch to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Replace Connected Device Touch to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Delete Connected Device Touch to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Bluetooth Touch to toggle Bluetooth® on and off.
LHA2844
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99
Information Provided by:
PHONE SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Press the [ ] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and adjust
the following settings as desired:
●Sort Phonebook By:
Touch “First Name” or “Last Name” to
choose how phonebook entries are alpha-
betically displayed on the screen.
●Use Phonebook From:
Touch “Handset” to use the phone’s phone-
book. Select “SIM” to use the phonebook on
the SIM card. Touch “Both” to use both
sources.
●Download Phonebook Now:
Touch to download the phonebook to the
vehicle from the chosen source.
●Record Name for Phonebook Entry:
Touch to record a name for a phonebook
entry for use with the NISSAN Voice Recog-
nition System.
●Phone Notifications for:
Touch “Driver” to have phone notifications
shown in the vehicle information display.
Touch “Both” to have phone notifications
shown in both the vehicle information display
and the center display screen.
●Text Messaging:
Touch to toggle the text message function-
ality on or off.
●Show Incoming Text for:
Touch “Driver” to have incoming text notifi-
cations shown in the vehicle information dis-
play. Touch “Both” to have text notifications
shown in both the vehicle information display
and the center display screen. Touch “Off” to
turn off all text notifications.
●Auto Reply:
Touch to toggle the auto reply functionality
on or off.
●Auto Reply Message:
Touch to indicate preferred message to be
sent when “Auto Reply” function is activated.
●Use Vehicle’s Signature:
Touch to toggle on or off the addition of the
vehicle signature to outgoing messages.
●Custom Text Messages:
Touch this option to select a custom mes-
sage to edit. There are 4 customer message
slots available.
4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the systems equipped on
this vehicle, such as the phone and navigation
systems.
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
the button located on the steering wheel.
When prompted, speak the command for the
system you wish to activate. The command given
is picked up by the microphone and performed
when it is properly recognized. NISSAN Voice
Recognition will provide a voice response as well
as a message in the center display to inform you
of the command results.
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which
takes a few seconds. When completed, the sys-
tem is ready to accept voice commands. If
the button is pressed before the initializa-
tion completes, the system will announce: “Voice
Recognition System not ready. Please wait.”
Giving voice commands
1. Press the button.
2. The system announces: “Please say a cat-
egory like phone or a command like points of
interest followed by a brand name”. A list of
available commands is then spoken by the
system.
3. After the tone sounds and the face icon on
the display changes, speak a command.
Available commands are discussed in this
section.
4. Voice and display feedback are provided
when the command is accepted.
●If the command is not recognized, the sys-
tem announces: “Command not recog-
nized”. Repeat the command in a clear voice.
●If you want to cancel the command or go
back to the previous menu of commands,
press the button. The system will an-
nounce: “Cancelling voice recognition” or
“Go back” depending on the current menu
level.
●Press the BACK button on the control panel
to move back through the menus displayed
on the screen.
●If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, use the volume control switches
on the steering wheel or the volume knob on
the control panel.
●The voice command screen can also be
accessed using the control panel display:
1. Press the [ ] button.
2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key.
LHA2522
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101
Information Provided by:
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of NISSAN
Voice Recognition, observe the following:
●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing the voice commands cor-
rectly.
●Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
●Start speaking a command within 3.5 sec-
onds after the tone sounds.
●Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
SYSTEM FEATURES
NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the fol-
lowing systems:
●Bluetooth™ Hands-Free Phone System
●Navigation
●Audio
●Information
●My Apps
For additional information on the navigation sys-
tem, see the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual.
How to say numbers
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer
to the following examples.
General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for
“0”.
Phone numbers
Speak phone numbers according to the following
example. For 1-800-662-6200, say dial number
and then speak the phone number in any of the
following formats:
●“one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”
●“one eight hundred six six two six two oh oh”
●“one eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh”
For the best voice recognition phone dialing re-
sults, say phone numbers as single digits. Also,
full numbers can only be spoken for “800”. For
example, you cannot say 555-6000 as “five five
five six thousand”.
LHA2780
4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE
PHONE SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
To access the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System voice commands:
1. Press the button.
2. Say “Call” and then a name in the vehicle
phonebook to call that entry. Otherwise, say
“Phone” to access various phone com-
mands.
If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off”, the
system announces: “Bluetooth® is off. Would
you like to turn Bluetooth® on?”
If no phone is connected to the system and the
vehicle is stationary, the system announces:
“There is no phone connected. Would you like to
connect a phone now?” Say “Yes” to connect a
phone. All further Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System voice commands are only available if a
phone is connected.
If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® is set to
“On”, the following voice commands are available:
●Call (a name)
Speak the name of the contact in which you
are trying to call. System will confirm correct
contact. Say “Dial” to initiate dialing.
●Dial Number
Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed. After
the number is entered, say “Dial” to initiate
dialing. Say “Correction” to correct the num-
ber entered. Say “Go Back” to return to the
main menu.
●List Phonebook
Starting with the first alphabetical entry in
the vehicle phonebook, the system prompts
for an additional command. Say “Dial” to call
the number of the phonebook entry. Say
“Send Text” to send a text message to the
number of the phonebook entry. Say “Next
Entry” to skip to the next alphabetical entry in
the vehicle phonebook, where the same op-
tions will then be available.
●Recent Calls
The system prompts for an additional com-
mand. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls”
or “Outgoing Calls” to display a list of such
calls on the screen.
Speak the number of the entry displayed on
the screen to dial that number or say “Next
Page” to view entries on the next page (if
available).
●Redial
Redials the last called number.
●Read Text
Reads an incoming text message. For more
information about text messaging with the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, see
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
with Navigation System” in this section.
●Send Text
Sends a text message. For more information
about text messaging with the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System, see
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
with Navigation System” in this section.
●Select Phone
The system replies “Please use manual con-
trols to continue”. Use manual controls to
change the active phone from among the
listed phones connected to the vehicle.
For more information about the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System, see “Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation Sys-
tem” in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103
Information Provided by:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
The following voice commands are available for
the Navigation System:
●Street Address (address)
●Points of Interest (name)
●POI by Category
●Home
●Address Book
●Previous Destinations
●Enter Address in Steps
●Cancel Route
For more information about these commands,
see the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
To access the audio system voice commands:
1. Press the button.
2. Say “Audio”
3. Speak a command from the following avail-
able commands:
●Play (AM, FM, etc.)
Allows user to select radio band
●Tune AM (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired AM
frequency
●Tune FM (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired FM
frequency
●SXM channel (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired
SXM station (if so equipped)
●CD Track (number)
Allows user to select track to be played
●Play Song (name)
Allows user to select song name to be
played
●Play Artist (name)
Allows user to select artist to be played
●Play Album (name)
Allows user to select album name to be
played
For more information about the audio system, see
“Audio system” in this section.
INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS
The following voice commands are available for
the information functions of the Navigation Sys-
tem:
●Traffic
●Fuel Prices
●Stocks
●Movie Listings
●Current Weather
●Weather Map
●5 — day Forecast
●6 — hour Forecast
For more information about these commands,
see the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS
Many Apps can be accessed using this voice
command. See “NissanConnect™ App Smart-
phone Integration” in this section for more infor-
mation.
4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Information Provided by:
HELP VOICE COMMANDS
The following voice commands can be spoken to
have the system provide instructions and tips for
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system.
●List Commands
●What Can I Say?
●General Help
●Quit
●Exit
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, follow the solutions given in this guide
for the appropriate error. Where the solutions are
listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting
with number one, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message Solution
The system responds “Command Not
Recognized” or the system fails to rec-
ognize the command correctly.
1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help” menu.
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105
Information Provided by:
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving................5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..................5-2
Three-way catalyst..............................5-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..........5-3
Avoiding collision and rollover....................5-6
Off-road recovery...............................5-6
Rapid air pressure loss ..........................5-7
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving................5-8
Ignition switch (if so equipped)......................5-8
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
(if so equipped) ................................5-8
Manual transmission (if so equipped) .............5-9
Key positions ..................................5-9
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system .............5-10
Push-Button Ignition Switch (if so equipped) ........5-10
Operating range...............................5-11
Push-button ignition switch positions ............5-11
Emergency engine shut off .....................5-12
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge.......5-12
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system .............5-13
Before starting the engine .........................5-13
Starting the engine ...............................5-14
Starting the engine (models with NISSAN
Intelligent Key® system)...........................5-15
Driving the vehicle ................................5-16
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
(if so equipped) ...............................5-16
Manual transmission (if so equipped) ............5-19
Parking brake ....................................5-21
SPORT mode switch .............................5-22
ECO mode switch ................................5-22
Gear shift indicator (Manual transmission
only) (if so equipped) ..........................5-23
Cruise control (if so equipped) .....................5-24
Precautions on cruise control ...................5-24
Cruise control operations.......................5-24
Break-in schedule ................................5-25
Fuel efficient driving tips...........................5-26
Increasing fuel economy...........................5-27
Parking/parking on hills............................5-28
Power steering ...................................5-29
Brake system ....................................5-30
Brake precautions .............................5-30
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).................5-30
Information Provided by:
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .............5-32
Cold weather driving..............................5-33
Freeing a frozen door lock ......................5-33
Anti-freeze....................................5-33
Battery .......................................5-33
Draining of coolant water .......................5-34
Tire equipment ................................5-34
Special winter equipment.......................5-34
Driving on snow or ice .........................5-34
Engine block heater (if so equipped).............5-35
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
●Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
●Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or
death.
●If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all win-
dows fully open, and have the vehicle
inspected immediately.
●Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
●Do not park the vehicle with the engine
running for any extended length of time.
●Keep the rear vent windows, lift gates,
doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)
closed while driving, otherwise exhaust
gases could be drawn into the passen-
ger compartment. If you must drive with
one of these open, follow these
precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the air recirculation but-
ton to off and the fan control dial to
high to circulate the air.
●If electrical wiring or other cable con-
nections must pass to a trailer through
the seal on the trunk lid or the body,
follow the manufacturer’s recommen-
dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-
try into the vehicle.
●The exhaust system and body should be
inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering into the passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system, un-
derbody, or rear of the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
WARNING
●The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-
tem are very hot. Keep people, animals
or flammable materials away from the
exhaust system components.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
5-2 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
●Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
CAUTION
●Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously re-
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to
help reduce exhaust pollutants.
●Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-
ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-
able loss of performance or other un-
usual operating conditions are
detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly by a NISSAN dealer.
●Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
three-way catalyst.
●Do not race the engine while warming it
up.
●Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and in-
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
all your tires to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-
ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Additional information:
●The TPMS does not monitor the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
Starting and driving 5-3
Information Provided by:
●The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle
is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
flat tire while driving).
●The low tire pressure warning light does not
automatically turn off when the tire pressure
of all your tires are adjusted. After the tires
are inflated to the recommended pressure,
the vehicle must be driven at speeds above
16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and
turn off the low tire pressure warning light.
Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure.
●The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning
message is displayed in the odometer when
the low tire pressure warning light is illumi-
nated and low tire pressure is detected. The
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning mes-
sage turns off when the low tire pressure
warning light turns off. The low tire pressure
warning light remains illuminated until the
tires are inflated to the recommended COLD
tire pressure. The CHECK TIRE PRES-
SURE warning message is displayed each
time the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position as long as the low tire pressure
warning light remains illuminated. See
“Check tire pressure warning message” in
the “Instruments and controls” section.
●The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning is
not displayed if the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunc-
tion.
●Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
and the outside temperature. Low outside
temperature can lower the temperature of
the air inside the tire which can cause a
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-
nate. If the warning light illuminates, check
the tire pressure for all four tires.
●The Tire and Loading Information label (also
referred to as the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label) is located in the
driver’s door opening.
For additional information, see “Low tire pressure
warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”
section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.
WARNING
●Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufac-
turer for the possible influences before
use.
●If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with under-
inflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an accident
and could result in serious personal in-
jury. Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case
of emergency” section for changing a
flat tire.)
5-4 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
●Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any metal
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This
may cause poor reception of the signals
from the tire pressure sensors, and the
TPMS will not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-
minate.
Some examples are:
– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio
frequencies are near the vehicle.
– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle.
– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
DC/AC converter is being used in or near the
vehicle.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modification not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with RSS-210 of In-
dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert (if so
equipped)
When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the
TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides visual and
audible signals outside the vehicle to help you
inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire
pressure.
Vehicle set-up:
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift
lever into the P (Park) position (if so
equipped).
3. Place the ignition switch to the ON position.
Do not start the engine.
Starting and driving 5-5
Information Provided by:
Operation:
1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators
will start flashing.
3. When the designated pressure is reached,
the horn beeps once and the hazard indica-
tors stop flashing.
4. Perform the above steps for each tire.
●If the tire is over-inflated more than ap-
proximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn
beeps and the hazard indicators flash 3
times. To correct the pressure, push the
core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to
release pressure. When the pressure
reaches the designated pressure, the
horn beeps once.
●If the hazard indicator does not flash
within approximately 15 seconds after
starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that
the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not operating.
●The TPMS will not activate the Easy Fill
Tire Alert under the following conditions:
– If there is interference from an external
device or transmitter.
– The air pressure from the inflation device
is not sufficient to inflate the tire.
– There is a malfunction in the TPMS sys-
tem.
– There is a malfunction in the horn or haz-
ard indicators.
– The identification code of the tires pres-
sure sensor is not registered to the sys-
tem.
– The battery of the tire pressure sensor is
low.
●If the Easy Fill Tire Alert does not operate
due to TPMS interference, move the ve-
hicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward
and try again.
If the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire
pressure gauge.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss of
control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-
neuvers, because these driving practices could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with
any vehicle, loss of control could result in a
collision with other vehicles or objects or
cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if
the loss of control causes the vehicle to
slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and
avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under
the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-
scription or over-the-counter drugs which may
cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt
as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do
so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli-
sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted or improperly belted person is
significantly more likely to be injured or
killed than a person properly wearing a
seat belt.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
If the right side or left side wheels unintentionally
leave the road surface, maintain control of the
vehicle by following the procedure below. Please
note that this procedure is only a general guide.
The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based
on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
5-6 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-
hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed
is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-
hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle
speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the
steering wheel until both tires return to the
road surface. When all tires are on the road
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-
propriate driving lane.
●If you decide that it is not safe to return the
vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,
road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the
vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur
if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to
hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss
can also be caused by driving on under-inflated
tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway
speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-
ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect
the tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels and
tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air
pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain
control of the vehicle by following the procedure
below. Please note that this procedure is only a
general guide. The vehicle must be driven as
appropriate based on the conditions of the ve-
hicle, road and traffic.
WARNING
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.
Losing control of the vehicle may cause a
collision and result in personal injury.
●The vehicle generally moves or pulls in
the direction of the flat tire.
●Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
●Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
●Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
either contact a roadside emergency service
to change the tire or see “Changing a flat
tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
Starting and driving 5-7
Information Provided by:
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-
duces coordination, delays reaction time
and impairs judgement. Driving after
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood
of being involved in an accident injuring
yourself and others. Additionally, if you
are injured in an accident, alcohol can
increase the severity of the injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-
though the local laws vary on what is considered
to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
affects all people differently and most people
underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! That is
true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, prescrip-
tion, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your ability to
operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol,
drugs, or some other physical condition.
WARNING
●Never remove or turn the key to the
LOCK position while driving. The steer-
ing wheel will lock (for models with a
steering lock mechanism). This may
cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle and could result in serious ve-
hicle damage or personal injury.
●Never place the ignition switch in the
LOCK position while driving. The steer-
ing wheel will lock (for models with a
steering lock mechanism). This may
cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle and could result in serious ve-
hicle damage or personal injury. CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so
equipped)
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position
until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.
●When moving the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, make sure the shift lever is in
the P (Park) position.
●When removing the key from the ignition
switch, make sure the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position.
WSD0041
IGNITION SWITCH (if so equipped)
5-8 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
When the ignition switch cannot be turned to the
LOCK position:
1. Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON
direction.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion.
4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the ignition
switch.
If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi-
tion, the shift lever cannot be moved from the P
(Park) position.
The shift lever can be moved if the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position and the
foot brake pedal is depressed.
There is an OFF position between the
LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position
is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
The ignition switch includes a device that helps
prevent accidental removal of the key while driv-
ing.
The key can only be removed when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position.
On manual transmission models, to turn the igni-
tion key to LOCK position from ACC or ON
position, turn the key to OFF, push the key in, then
turn the key to LOCK.
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it
must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise
from the straight up position.
To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to
the LOCK position. Remove the key. To
unlock the steering wheel, insert the key
and turn it gently while rotating the steer-
ing wheel slightly right and left.
KEY POSITIONS
LOCK: Normal parking position (0)
OFF: (Not used) (1)
ACC: (Accessories) (2)
This position activates electrical accessories
such as the radio when the engine is not running.
ON: Normal operating position (3)
This position turns on the ignition system and the
electrical accessories.
START: (4)
This position starts the engine. As soon as the
engine has started, release the key. It automati-
cally returns to the ON position.
WSD0052
Starting and driving 5-9
Information Provided by:
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
cedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
rate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition
switch while driving the vehicle except in
an emergency. (The engine will stop when
the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecu-
tive times in quick succession or the igni-
tion switch is pushed and held for more
than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while
the vehicle is being driven, this could lead
to a crash and serious injury.
When the ignition switch is pushed without de-
pressing the brake pedal or the clutch pedal
(MT), the ignition switch position will illuminate as
follows:
Push center
●once to change to ACC.
●two times to change to ON.
●three times to return to OFF.
The ignition switch will automatically return to the
LOCK position when any door is either opened or
closed with the switch in the OFF position.
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch position cannot be switched to OFF until
the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position or
N (Neutral) position (MT).
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to-
ward the OFF position, proceed as follows:
1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position
or N (Neutral) position (MT).
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch
position will change to the ON position.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF
position.
The shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
LSD2014
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (if
so equipped)
5-10 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the push-button ignition switch cannot be
moved from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are
displayed in the meter. See “Warning/indicator
lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments
and controls” section.
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-
charged or strong radio waves are present near
the operating location, the Intelligent Key sys-
tem’s operating range becomes narrower and
may not function properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range,
it is possible for anyone, even someone who does
not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition
switch to start the engine.
The operating range of the engine start function
is inside of the vehicle 䊊
1.
●The luggage area is not included in the op-
erating range, but the Intelligent Key may
function.
●If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instru-
ment panel, inside the glove box, storage bin
or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not
function.
●If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door
or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent
Key may function.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position):
The ignition switch can only be locked in this
position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is
pushed to the ACC position while carrying the
Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted
in the port.
The ignition switch will lock when any door is
opened or closed with the ignition switched off.
LSD2089
Starting and driving 5-11
Information Provided by:
OFF:
The ignition switch is in the OFF position when
the engine is turned off using the ignition switch.
No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.
ACC (Accessories):
This position activates electrical accessories,
such as the radio, when the engine is not running.
ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position after 30 min-
utes under the following conditions:
●all doors are closed.
●shift lever is in P (Park).
The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any
of the following occur:
●any door is opened.
●shift lever is moved out of P (Park).
●ignition switch changes position.
ON (Normal operating position):
This position turns on the ignition system and
electrical accessories.
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition
switch in ACC or ON positions when the
engine is not running for an extended pe-
riod. This can discharge the battery.
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation
while driving, perform the following procedure:
– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3
consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch
for more than 2 seconds.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® is
discharged, or environmental conditions interfere
with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine
according to the following procedure:
1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
SSD0860
5-12 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent
Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)
After step 3 is performed, when the ignition
switch is pushed without depressing the
brake pedal, the ignition switch position will
change to ACC.
4. Push the ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the
chime sounds. The engine will start.
NOTE:
●When the ignition switch is pushed to the
ACC or ON position or the engine is started
by the above procedure, the Intelligent Key
battery discharge indicator appears in the
vehicle information display even when the
Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is
not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent
Key battery discharge indicator, touch the
ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again.
●If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indi-
cator appears, replace the battery as soon
as possible. See “Battery Replacement” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-
tion.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
cedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
rate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
●Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
●Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-
ant, brake and clutch fluid(if so equipped),
and windshield-washer fluid as frequently as
possible, or at least whenever you refuel.
●Check that all windows and lights are clean.
●Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
●Lock all doors.
●Position seat and adjust head
restraints/headrests.
●Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
●Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
●Check the operation of warning lights when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion. See “Warning/indicator lights and au-
dible reminders” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
Starting and driving 5-13
Information Provided by:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. CVT model:
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of
P (Park) and into any of the other gear
positions if the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF position or if the key
is removed from the ignition switch.
The starter is designed not to operate if
the shift lever is in any of the driving
positions.
Manual transmission model:
Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress
the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking
the engine.
The starter is designed not to operate
unless the clutch pedal is fully de-
pressed.
The Intelligent Key must be carried
when operating the ignition switch.
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by turning the ignition
switch to START. Release the switch when
the engine starts. If the engine starts, but
fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
●If the engine is very hard to start in ex-
tremely cold weather or when restarting,
depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-
proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it
and then crank the engine. Release the
switch and the accelerator pedal when
the engine starts.
●If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After
cranking the engine, release the accel-
erator pedal. Crank the engine with your
foot off the accelerator pedal by turn-
ing the ignition switch to START. Release
the key when the engine starts. If the
engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the
above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, turn the ignition switch to off and
wait 10 seconds before cranking again,
otherwise the starter could be damaged.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-
onds after starting. Do not race the engine
while warming it up. Drive at moderate
speed for a short distance first, especially in
cold weather.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic
accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (Phone char-
gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only
driven short distances. In these cases, the
battery may need to be charged to maintain
battery health.
STARTING THE ENGINE
5-14 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Continuously Variable Transmission:
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral). P (Park) is recommended.
The starter is designed not to operate if
the shift lever is in any of the driving
positions.
Manual Transmission:
Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress
the clutch pedal to the floor.
The starter is designed not to operate
unless the clutch pedal is fully de-
pressed.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
Depress the brake pedal and the clutch
pedal (if so equipped) and push the ignition
switch to start the engine.
To start the engine immediately, push and
release the ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal with the ignition switch in
any position.
●If the engine is very hard to start in ex-
tremely cold weather or when restarting,
depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-
proximately 1/3 to the floor) and while
holding, crank the engine. Release the
accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
●If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion to start cranking the engine. After 5 or
6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the
ignition switch to LOCK. After cranking
the engine, release the accelerator pedal.
Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by depressing the
brake pedal and pushing the push-button
ignition switch to start the engine. If the
engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the
above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, push the ignition switch to the
OFF position and wait 10 seconds before
cranking again, otherwise the starter
could be damaged.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-
onds after starting. Do not race the engine
while warming it up. Drive at moderate
speed for a short distance first, especially in
cold weather. In cold weather, keep the en-
gine running for a minimum of2-3minutes
before shutting it off. Starting and stopping
the engine over a short period of time may
make the vehicle more difficult to start.
5. To stop the engine, shift the shift lever to the
P (Park) position or to N (Neutral) and apply
the parking brake (M/T) and push the igni-
tion switch to the OFF position.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic
accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (Phone char-
gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only
driven short distances. In these cases, the
battery may need to be charged to maintain
battery health.
STARTING THE ENGINE (models with
NISSAN Intelligent Key® system)
Starting and driving 5-15
Information Provided by:
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so
equipped)
WARNING
●Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).
Always depress the brake pedal until
shifting is completed. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and
have an accident.
●Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward or
reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
●Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving. This could
cause an accident.
CAUTION
●Except in an emergency, do not shift to
the N (Neutral) position while driving.
Coasting with the transmission in the N
(Neutral) position may cause serious
damage to the transmission.
●When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
grade, do not hold the vehicle by de-
pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot
brake should be used for this purpose.
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-
trolled to produce maximum power and smooth
operation.
The recommended operating procedures for this
transmission are shown on the following pages.
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.
NOTE:
Engine power may be automatically re-
duced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.
Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal before moving the shift
lever out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
move the shift lever into a driving gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start
the vehicle in motion.
4. Stop the vehicle completely before shifting
the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
The CVT is designed so the foot brake
pedal MUST be depressed before shifting
from P (Park) to any drive position while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of P
(Park) and into any of the other gear posi-
tions if the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK or OFF position or if the key is re-
moved.
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
5-16 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
To move the shift lever:
Push the button 䊊
Awhile depressing the
brake pedal
Push the button 䊊
Ato shift
Shift without pushing button 䊊
A
Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
pedal and move the shift lever from P (Park) to
any of the desired shift positions.
WARNING
●Apply the parking brake if the shift lever
is in any position while the engine is not
running. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal in-
jury or property damage.
If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position for
any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or
any drive position, the key cannot be turned to the
LOCK position and be removed from the ignition
switch. If this occurs, perform the following steps:
1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is
stopped.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) to park the
vehicle and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position to remove the key.
P (Park):
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the
vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.
The brake pedal must be depressed and
the shift lever button pushed in to move the
shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive
position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
first, then place the shift lever into the P (Park)
position.
R (Reverse):
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before
selecting R (Reverse) position. The brake
pedal must be depressed and the shift lever
button pushed in to move the shift lever
from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive po-
sition to R (Reverse).
N (Neutral):
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
engine can be started in this position. You may
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine
while the vehicle is moving.
LSD2131
Starting and driving 5-17
Information Provided by:
D (Drive):
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
L (Low):
Use this position for maximum engine braking on
steep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopes
and whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not
use the L (Low) position in any other circum-
stances.
Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the
shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park)
position even with the brake pedal depressed
and the shift lever button pressed.
It will be necessary to jump start or have your
battery charged, see “Jump starting” in the “In
case of emergency” section. Contact your
NISSAN dealer or a professional towing service.
To move the shift lever, complete the following
procedure:
1. Press the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Using a protective cloth on the tip ofa3mm
screwdriver, remove the shift lock release
cover.
●If available, a plastic trim tool can also be
used.
4. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift lock
release slot and push down.
5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) posi-
tion while holding down the shift lock re-
lease.
6. Push the ignition switch to the ON position
to unlock the steering wheel. Now the ve-
hicle may be moved to the desired location.
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park),
have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission as
soon as possible.
WARNING
If the shift lever cannot be moved from the
P (Park) position while the engine is run-
ning and the brake pedal is depressed, the
stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning
stop lights could cause an accident injur-
ing yourself and others.
LSD2193
5-18 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch
When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with the
shift lever in the D (Drive) position, the
light in the instrument panel illuminates. See
“Overdrive off indicator light (CVT models)” in the
“Instruments and controls”section of this manual.
Use the Overdrive off mode when you need im-
proved engine braking.
To turn off the Overdrive off mode, push the O/D
OFF switch again. The indicator light will
turn off.
Each time the engine is started, or when the shift
lever is shifted to any position other than D
(Drive), the Overdrive off mode will be automati-
cally turned off.
Accelerator downshift
— in D position —
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-
erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-
sion down into a lower gear, depending on the
vehicle speed.
Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the CVT will
not be shifted into the selected driving position.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-
ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning
and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe
system may be activated. The MIL may
come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is
activated, see “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” in the “Instruments and controls”
section. This will occur even if all electrical
circuits are functioning properly. In this
case, place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and wait for 10 seconds. Then
place the ignition switch back in the ON
position. The vehicle should return to its
normal operating condition. If it does not
return to its normal operating condition,
have a NISSAN dealer check the transmis-
sion and repair if necessary.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protec-
tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,
vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.
The reduced speed may be lower than
other traffic, which could increase the
chance of a collision. Be especially careful
when driving. If necessary, pull to the side
of the road at a safe place and allow the
transmission to return to normal opera-
tion, or have it repaired if necessary.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
WARNING
●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
●Do not over-rev the engine when shift-
ing to a lower gear. This may cause a
loss of control or engine damage.
●Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position
while driving. Doing so may result in an
accident due to loss of engine braking.
LSD2130
Starting and driving 5-19
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
●Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
while driving. This may cause clutch
damage.
●Fully depress the clutch pedal before
shifting to help prevent transmission
damage.
●Stop your vehicle completely before
shifting into R (Reverse).
●When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running (for example, at a stop
light), shift to N (Neutral) and release
the clutch pedal with the foot brake
applied.
●Do not shift to the “N” (Neutral) position
while driving. Doing so may result in an
accident due to loss of engine braking.
Shifting
To change gears or when upshifting or down-
shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into
the appropriate gear, then release the clutch
slowly and smoothly.
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress
the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. If
the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the
transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be
heard. Transmission damage may occur.
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,
4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according
to vehicle speed.
To back up, lift up on the shift lever ring 䊊
1and
then move it to the R (Reverse) position after
stopping the vehicle completely.
The shift lever ring 䊊
1returns to its original posi-
tion when the shift lever is moved to the N (Neu-
tral) position.
If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R
(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then
release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch
pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).
Suggested up-shift speeds
The following are suggested vehicle speeds for
shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions
relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.
Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road
conditions, the weather and individual driving
habits.
GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h)
1st to 2nd 8 (13)
2nd to 3rd 17 (27)
3rd to 4th 25 (40)
4th to 5th 36 (58)
5th to 6th 51 (82)
SSD0552
5-20 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
Suggested maximum speed in each
gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not
running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed
(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,
use the highest gear suggested for that speed.
Always observe posted speed limits, and drive
according to the road conditions, which will en-
sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine
when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
MRA8DE engine models (6 M/T)
GEAR km/h (MPH)
1st 48 (30)
2nd 84 (52)
3rd 117 (73)
4th 152 (94)
5th —
6th —
WARNING
●Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
leased before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
●Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
●Do not use the shift lever in place of the
parking brake. When parking, be sure
the parking brake is fully engaged.
●Do not leave children unattended in a
vehicle. They could release the parking
brake and cause an accident.
To engage: Pull the lever up 䊊
A.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Manual transmission models:
Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
CVT models:
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever
slightly, push the button and lower com-
pletely 䊊
B.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.
LIC2651
PARKING BRAKE
Starting and driving 5-21
Information Provided by:
Adjusts the throttle sensitivity and transmission
points (CVT only) to enhance performance. Press
the SPORT button on the instrument panel to
activate. The SPORT mode indicator light (on the
speedometer) will illuminate. The SPORT mode
indicator light will remain lit while the mode is
active.
NOTE:
In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may be
reduced.
The ECO mode helps to enhance the fuel
economy by controlling the throttle sensitivity and
transmission points (CVT if so equipped).
To turn on the ECO mode, push the ECO mode
switch. The ECO mode indicator light (on the
speedometer) will remain lit while the mode is
active.
To turn off the ECO mode, push the ECO mode
switch again. The ECO mode indicator light (on
the speedometer) will turn off.
The ECO mode cannot be turned off while the
accelerator pedal is depressed, even if the ECO
mode switch is pushed to OFF. Release the
accelerator pedal to turn off the ECO mode.
The ECO mode will turn off automatically if a
malfunction occurs in the system.
Turn off the ECO mode, or depress the accelera-
tor pedal fully when:
●driving with a heavy load of passengers or
cargo in the vehicle
●driving on a steep uphill slope
●ECO mode may affect air conditioner perfor-
mance
NOTE:
Selecting this drive mode will not necessar-
ily improve fuel economy as many driving
factors influence its effectiveness.
LIC2417
ECO mode switch
LIC2416
SPORT MODE SWITCH ECO MODE SWITCH
5-22 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
GEAR SHIFT INDICATOR (Manual
transmission only) (if so equipped)
The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) is used to support
the suitable timing of gear change. It operates
only when the ECO mode is in the “ON” state.
The shift indicator icon 䊊
2and recommended
gear position 䊊
3are displayed.
The shift indicator icon indicates when to upshift
or downshift for fuel economy.
NOTE:
●The shift indicator is a guide for fuel
economy. Always pay attention to road con-
ditions and other traffic.
●Downshift indicator icon to the “1” (1st) po-
sition is not displayed.
●If the downshifting icon is displayed when
decreasing your vehicle speed, it indicates
that the engine speed is low compared to
the gear position.
LSD2143
Starting and driving 5-23
Information Provided by:
1. ACCEL/RES switch
2. COAST/SET switch
3. CANCEL switch
4. ON·OFF switch
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
●If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
cancels automatically. The CRUISE indica-
tor light in the instrument panel then blinks to
warn the driver, see “Warnings/Indicator
Lights and Audible Reminders” in the “In-
struments and controls” section.
●If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, push the
cruise control ON·OFF switch off and have
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
●The CRUISE indicator light may blink when
the cruise control ON·OFF switch is pushed
ON while pushing the ACCEL/RES,
COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To prop-
erly set the cruise control system, use the
following procedures.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions:
●When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
●In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
speed.
●On winding or hilly roads.
●On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
●In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-
tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
ON·OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument panel comes on.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch
and release it. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.
●To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-
celerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously
set speed.
●The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
when going up or down steep hills. If this
happens, drive without the cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods.
●Push the CANCEL button, or
●Tap the brake pedal, or
●Push the ON·OFF switch off. The CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument panel go out.
LSD2003
CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
5-24 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
The cruise control is automatically canceled if:
●you depress the brake or clutch pedal while
pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST
switch. The preset speed is deleted from
memory.
●the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH
(13 km/h) below the set speed.
●you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-
mission), or move the shift lever to N (Neu-
tral) (CVT).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of
the following three methods.
●Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the COAST/SET switch.
●Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you de-
sire, release the switch.
●Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed in-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.
●Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-
hicle attains the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it.
●Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-
lease the switch when the vehicle slows to
the desired speed.
●Push and release the COAST/SET switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed de-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and re-
lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-
turns to the last set cruising speed when the
vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and ensure
the future reliability and economy of your
new vehicle. Failure to follow these rec-
ommendations may result in shortened
engine life and reduced engine
performance.
●Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the
engine over 4,000 RPM.
●Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
●Avoid quick starts.
●Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
●Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 mi
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
Starting and driving 5-25
Information Provided by:
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving
Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy
from your vehicle.
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake
Pedal Application
●Avoid rapid starts and stops
●Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible
●Maintain constant speed while commut-
ing and coast whenever possible
2. Maintain Constant Speed
●Look ahead to try and anticipate and mini-
mize stops
●Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your number
of stops
●Maintaining a steady speed can minimize
red light stops and improve fuel efficiency
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher
Vehicle Speeds
●Below 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to open windows to cool the
vehicle due to reduced engine load
●Above 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle
due to increased aerodynamic drag
●Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
when the A/C is on reduces cooling load
4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-
tances
●Observing the speed limit and not ex-
ceeding 60 MPH (97 km/h) (where le-
gally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency
due to reduced aerodynamic drag
●Maintaining a safe following distance be-
hind other vehicles reduces unnecessary
braking
●Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
changes in speed permits reduced brak-
ing and smooth acceleration changes
●Select a gear range suitable to road con-
ditions
5. Use Cruise Control
●Using cruise control during highway driv-
ing helps maintain a steady speed
●Cruise control is particularly effective in
providing fuel savings when driving on flat
terrains
6. Plan for the Shortest Route
●Utilize a map or navigation system to de-
termine the best route to save time
7. Avoid Idling
●Shutting off your engine when safe for
stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves
fuel and reduces emissions
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads
●Automated passes permit drivers to use
special lanes to maintain cruising speed
through the toll and avoid stopping and
starting
9. Winter Warm Up
●Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel
economy
●Vehicles typically need no more than
30 seconds of idling at start-up to effec-
tively circulate the engine oil before driv-
ing
●Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating
temperature more quickly while driving
versus idling
FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
5-26 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
●Park your vehicle in a covered parking
area or in the shade whenever possible
●When entering a hot vehicle, opening the
windows will help to reduce the inside
temperature faster, resulting in reduced
demand on your A/C system
11. ECO Mode
●The ECO mode helps to enhance the fuel
economy by controlling the engine and CVT
(if so equipped) operation automatically to
avoid rapid acceleration.
●Keep your engine tuned up.
●Follow the recommended scheduled main-
tenance.
●Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-
sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
●Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-
proper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
●Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-
tions” in “Technical and consumer informa-
tion” in this manual.
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
Starting and driving 5-27
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
●Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park) for
CVT models or in an appropriate gear
for manual transmission models. Fail-
ure to do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away and re-
sult in an accident. Make sure the shift
lever has been pushed as far forward as
it can go and cannot be moved without
depressing the foot brake pedal.
●Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.
●Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Manual transmission models:
Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion. When parking on an uphill grade, place
the shift lever in 1st gear.
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models:
Move the shift lever into the P (Park) posi-
tion.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
●HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: 䊊
1
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel
gently touches the curb.
●HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: 䊊
2
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
SSD0488
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
5-28 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
●HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB: 䊊
3
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road
so the vehicle will move away from the cen-
ter of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion and remove the key.
WARNING
●If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the steering will not work. Steering will
be harder to operate.
●When the power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running,
there will be no power assist for the
steering. You will still have control of
the vehicle but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
The power steering system is designed to pro-
vide power assist while driving to operate the
steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly
or continuously while parking or driving at a very
low speed, the power assist for the steering
wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent over-
heating of the power steering system and protect
it from getting damaged. While the power assist
is reduced, steering wheel operation will become
heavy. When the temperature of the power steer-
ing system goes down, the power assist level will
return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering
wheel operations that could cause the power
steering system to overheat.
You may hear a sound when the steering wheel is
operated quickly. However, this is not a malfunc-
tion.
If the electric power steering warning light PS
illuminates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the power steering system is not func-
tioning properly and may need servicing. Have
the power steering system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
When the electric power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running, there will be
no power assist for the steering but you will still
have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater
steering effort is required to operate the steering
wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low
speeds.
For additional information see “Power steering
warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”
section.
POWER STEERING
Starting and driving 5-29
Information Provided by:
The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at 2 wheels.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-
tance will be longer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the
brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.
WARNING
●While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-
erating could cause the wheels to skid
and result in an accident.
●If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the brakes will not work. Braking will be
harder.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to
heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return
to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high
speeds until the brakes function correctly.
Parking brake break-in
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the
effect of the parking brake is weakened or when-
ever the parking brake shoes and/or drum/rotors
are replaced, in order to assure the best brake
performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle service
manual and can be performed by a NISSAN
dealer.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS)
WARNING
●The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a
sophisticated device, but it cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from careless
or dangerous driving techniques. It can
help maintain vehicle control during
braking on slippery surfaces. Remem-
ber that stopping distances on slippery
surfaces will be longer than on normal
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-
tances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front of
you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-
sible for safety.
●Tire type and condition may also affect
braking effectiveness.
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
BRAKE SYSTEM
5-30 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and type
as specified on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See “Technical
and consumer information” section
of this manual.
– For detailed information, see
“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the
brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.
The system detects the rotation speed at each
wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-
vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By
preventing each wheel from locking, the system
helps the driver maintain steering control and
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-
pery surfaces.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-
press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,
but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-
ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.
Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
tests the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or
reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear
a “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-
tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the
ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The
brake system then operates normally, but without
anti-lock assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Normal operation
The ABS operates at speeds above3-6MPH(5
- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road
conditions.
When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are
close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies
and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is
similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a
noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from
the actuator when it is operating. This is normal
and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.
However, the pulsation may indicate that road
conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-
quired while driving.
Starting and driving 5-31
Information Provided by:
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses
various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-
hicle motion. Under certain driving conditions,
the VDC System helps to perform the following
functions:
●Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is
transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on
the same axle.
●Controls brake pressure and engine output
to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle
speed (traction control function).
●Controls brake pressure at individual wheels
and engine output to help the driver maintain
control of the vehicle in the following condi-
tions:
– understeer (vehicle tends to not follow
the steered path despite increased steer-
ing input)
– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to
certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain
control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of
vehicle control in all driving situations.
When the VDC system operates, the indi-
cator in the instrument panel flashes to note the
following:
●The road may be slippery or the system may
determine some action is required to help
keep the vehicle on the steered path.
●You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
and hear a noise or vibration from under the
hood. This is normal and indicates that the
VDC system is working properly.
●Adjust your speed and driving to the road
conditions.
See “Slip indicator light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the ”Instru-
ments and controls” section.
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
indicator light comes on in the instrument panel.
The VDC system automatically turns off when the
indicator light is off.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC
system. The indicator illuminates to indi-
cate the VDC system is off.
When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
system, the VDC system still operates to prevent
one drive wheel from slipping by transferring
power to a non slipping drive wheel. The
indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC
functions are off and the indicator will not
flash.
The VDC system is automatically reset to on
when the ignition switch is placed in the off
position then back to the on position.
The computer has a built in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse
at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you
may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in
the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an
indication of a malfunction.
WARNING
●The VDC system is designed to help the
driver maintain stability but does not
prevent accidents due to abrupt steer-
ing operation at high speeds or by care-
less or dangerous driving techniques.
Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
careful when driving and cornering on
slippery surfaces and always drive
carefully.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
5-32 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock ab-
sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN
recommended for your vehicle or are
extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly. This could
adversely affect vehicle handling per-
formance, and the indicator may
flash or the indicator light may
illuminate.
●If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC system may not
operate properly and the indica-
tor light may illuminate.
●If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the indicator light
may illuminate.
●When driving on extremely inclined sur-
faces such as higher banked corners,
the VDC system may not operate prop-
erly and the indicator may flash or
the indicator light may illuminate.
Do not drive on these types of roads.
●When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the indicator may flash or
the indicator light may illuminate.
This is not a malfunction. Restart the
engine after driving onto a stable
surface.
●If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN
recommended ones are used, the VDC
system may not operate properly and
the indicator may flash or
the indicator light may illuminate.
●The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-
icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key
hole, or use the remote keyless entry keyfob or
the NISSAN Intelligent Key®.
ANTI-FREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-
perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the
anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.
For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may
freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-
mum efficiency, the battery should be checked
regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
Starting and driving 5-33
Information Provided by:
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.
For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry pave-
ment. However, the performance of these
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy
and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-
hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-
mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please
consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,
size, speed rating and availability informa-
tion.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their
use. Check local, state and provincial laws
before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For details see
“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be
carried in the vehicle during winter:
●A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
blades.
●A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
●A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
●Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
●Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until the road is salted or
sanded.
●Whatever the condition, drive with cau-
tion. Accelerate and slow down with
care. If accelerating or downshifting too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even
more traction.
●Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
●Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
●Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of
ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-
ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,
and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
●Do not use the cruise control (if so
equipped) on slippery roads.
●Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.
5-34 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold
temperature starting.
The engine block heater should be used when
the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) or lower.
WARNING
●Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system or
a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seri-
ously injured by an electrical shock if
you use an ungrounded connection.
●Disconnect and properly store the en-
gine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could
result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.
●Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-
tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug
the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the
proper extension cord or a grounded
outlet can result in a fire or electrical
shock and cause serious personal
injury.
To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block
heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3 wire, 3 pronged extension cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-
volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least2-4hours, depending on outside
temperatures, to properly warm the engine
coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the
engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-
erly store the cord to keep it away from
moving parts.
Starting and driving 5-35
Information Provided by:
MEMO
5-36 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
6 In case of emergency
Emergency engine shut off
(Push-button ignition models only)...................6-2
Hazard warning flasher switch ......................6-2
Flat tire ...........................................6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..........6-3
Changing a flat tire .............................6-3
Jump starting .....................................6-8
Push starting.....................................6-10
If your vehicle overheats ...........................6-10
Towing your vehicle ...............................6-11
Towing recommended by NISSAN ..............6-12
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . ......6-14
Information Provided by:
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation
while driving, perform the following procedure:
– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3
consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch
for more than 2 seconds.
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency condi-
tions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
●If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
●Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
●Turn signals do not work when the haz-
ard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
placed in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
LIC0394
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
(Push-button ignition models only)
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH
6-2 In case of emergency
Information Provided by:
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-
sure of all tires except the spare. When the low
tire pressure warning light is lit, and the CHECK
TIRE PRES warning message is displayed in the
odometer, one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with
low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and
warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning
light. This system will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). For more details, refer to
“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders”
in the “Instruments and controls” section, and
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section.
WARNING
●Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufac-
turer for the possible influences before
use.
●If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with under-
inflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an accident
and could result in serious personal in-
jury. Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
●Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-
low:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Shift the manual transmission into R
(Reverse), or the CVT into P (Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
signal professional road assistance person-
nel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.
FLAT TIRE
In case of emergency 6-3
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the manual transmission is
shifted into R (Reverse), or the CVT is
shifted into P (Park).
●Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
●Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-
sional road assistance.
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks 䊊
1at both the front and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire
䊊
2to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.
WCE0044 LCE2058
6-4 In case of emergency
Information Provided by:
Getting the spare tire and tools
1. Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting
and spare tire cover 䊊
A. Remove the jack
and the spare tire as indicated.
2. To remove the jack, take off the strap and lift
out. If necessary, remove the spare tire first
to easily access the jack strap.
Removing the wheel cover (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-
sult in personal injury.
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod 䊊
1
as illustrated.
Apply cloth 䊊
2between the wheel and jack rod to
prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.
Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or
wheel surface.
Jacking up vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
WARNING
●Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle, sup-
port it with safety stands.
●Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
jack provided with your vehicle on other
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change.
WCE0203 SCE0630 CE1089
In case of emergency 6-5
Information Provided by:
●Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
●Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
●Never use blocks on or under the jack.
●Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for vehicles with limited slip
differentials.
●Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
●Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to
move.
Always refer to the proper illustrations for the
correct placement and jack-up points for your
specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached to
the jack body and the following instruc-
tions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
until the tire is off the ground.
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the two
notches in the front or the rear as shown.
Also fit the groove of the jack head between
the notches as shown.
The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the
vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-
move the wheel nuts, and then remove the
tire.
LCE2059
6-6 In case of emergency
Information Provided by:
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. See specific instructions under the
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-
tween the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until
they are tight.
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
in the sequence illustrated (䊊
A,䊊
B,䊊
C,䊊
D,
䊊
E). Lower the vehicle completely.
WARNING
●Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
●Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
to become loose.
●Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-
hicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
to the specified torque with a torque
wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specification at all times. It is recom-
mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specification at each lubrication interval.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire
and Loading Information Label.
5. Securely store the flat tire in the vehicle.
WCE0056
In case of emergency 6-7
Information Provided by:
6. Install the jack in its storage area and tighten
the jack strap .
7. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor
carpeting over the damaged tire.
8. Close the trunk.
WARNING
●Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly se-
cured after use. Such items can become
dangerous projectiles in an accident or
sudden stop.
●The spare tire is designed for emer-
gency use. See specific instructions un-
der the heading “Wheels and tires” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
To start your engine with a booster battery, the
instructions and precautions below must be fol-
lowed.
WARNING
●If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
●Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres-
ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all
sparks and flames away from the
battery.
●Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-
rosive sulfuric acid solution which can
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything, imme-
diately flush the contacted area with
water.
●Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
●The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.
LCE2060
JUMP STARTING
6-8 In case of emergency
Information Provided by:
●Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
●Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause se-
rious injury.
●Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Fail-
ure to do so could result in damage to the
charging system and cause personal
injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,
position the two vehicles to bring their bat-
teries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever
to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary elec-
trical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner,
etc.).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
tion.
4. Remove the vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with an old
cloth to reduce explosion hazard.
5. Connect the jumper cables in the sequence
illustrated (䊊
A,䊊
B,䊊
C,䊊
D).
WCE0054
In case of emergency 6-9
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
●Always connect positive (⫹) to positive
(⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, engine
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
●Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine com-
partment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.
6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and
let it run for a few minutes.
7. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-
hicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the en-
gine of the vehicle being jump started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
not start right away, place the ignition
switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to
4 seconds before trying again.
8.
After starting the engine, carefully disconnect
the negative cable and then the positive cable.
9. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
the vent holes as it may be contaminated
with corrosive acid.
CAUTION
●Do not push start this vehicle. The
three-way catalyst may be damaged.
●Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models and Manual Transmission
(MT) cannot be push-started or tow-
started. Attempting to do so may cause
transmission damage
●For manual transmission (MT) models,
never try to start the vehicle by towing it.
When the engine starts, the forward
surge could cause the vehicle to collide
with the tow vehicle.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
noise, etc., take the following steps.
WARNING
●Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire.
●To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while the
engine is still hot. When the radiator
cap is removed, pressurized hot water
will spurt out, possibly causing serious
injury.
●Do not open the hood if steam is com-
ing out.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the shift lever to
N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P
(Park) (CVT).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).
Open all the windows, move the heater or air
conditioner temperature control to maximum
hot and fan control to high speed.
PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
6-10 In case of emergency
Information Provided by:
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-
ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not
open the hood further until no steam or
coolant can be seen.
4. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the en-
gine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-
gine.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan
can start at any time.
6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-
ant level in the engine coolant reservoir with
the engine running. Add coolant to the en-
gine coolant reservoir if necessary. Have
your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer.
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in
Canada) and local regulations for towing must be
followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-
age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-
able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-
tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have
the service operator carefully read the following
precautions:
WARNING
●Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
●Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
●When towing, make sure that the trans-
mission, axles, steering system and
powertrain are in working condition. If
any of these conditions apply, dollies or
a flatbed tow truck must be used.
●Always attach safety chains before
towing.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
In case of emergency 6-11
Information Provided by:
For information about towing your vehicle behind
a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”
in the “Starting and Driving” section of this
manual.
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.
䊊
A
(CVT) Continuously Variable Transmission
䊊
B
(M/T) Manual transmission
WCE0194
6-12 In case of emergency
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
●Never tow Continuously Variable Trans-
mission (CVT) models with the front
wheels on the ground or four wheels on
the ground (forward or backward), as
this may cause serious and expensive
damage to the transmission. If it is nec-
essary to tow the vehicle with the rear
wheels raised always use towing dollies
under the front wheels.
●When towing Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) models with the
front wheels on towing dollies, or when
towing manual transmission (M/T)
models with the front wheels on the
ground:
– Place the ignition switch to the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by placing
the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion. This may damage the steering
lock mechanism (for models with
steering lock mechanism).
– Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position.
●When towing Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) or manual trans-
mission models (M/T) with the rear
wheels on the ground (if you do not use
towing dollies): Always release the
parking brake.
●Observe the following restricted towing
speeds and distances for manual trans-
missions (M/T) only:
– Speed: Below 80 km/h (50 MPH)
– Distance: Less than 80 km (50 miles)
䊊
A
(CVT) Continuously Variable Transmission
䊊
B
(M/T) Manual transmission
WCE0195
In case of emergency 6-13
Information Provided by:
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)
Do not use the hook to tow the vehicle.
●Remove the cover bumper bracket using a
flat screwdriver or any flat tool.
●To protect the bumper body, place a piece of
cloth between the tool and the vehicle.
●The tool used should be inserted by the
lower portion of the cover.
●To remove the cover it is necessary to rotate
the flat tool, as shown in the image, in order
to avoid any damage to the body.
Do not use the hook to tow the vehicle.
Pulling a stuck vehicle
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal
injury or death when recovering a stuck
vehicle:
●Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.
Front (if so equipped)
LCE2065
Front (if so equipped)
LCE2052
Rear (if so equipped)
SCE0578
6-14 In case of emergency
Information Provided by:
●Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow
or free a stuck vehicle.
●Only use devices specifically designed
for vehicle recovery and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
●Always pull the recovery device straight
out from the front of the vehicle. Never
pull at an angle.
●Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except the
attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-
cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery de-
vice.
Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing or
vehicle recovery.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
●Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
●Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control Sys-
tem.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
ward.
●Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and D (Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low)
and R (Reverse) (M/T models).
●Apply the accelerator as little as possible
to maintain the rocking motion.
●Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low) and R
(Reverse) (M/T models).
●Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH
(55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-15
Information Provided by:
MEMO
6-16 In case of emergency
Information Provided by:
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior ..................................7-2
Washing ......................................7-2
Waxing ........................................7-2
Removing spots ................................7-3
Underbody ....................................7-3
Glass .........................................7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels ..........................7-3
Chrome parts ..................................7-3
Tire dressings ..................................7-3
Cleaning interior...................................7-4
Air fresheners ..................................7-4
Floor mats .....................................7-4
Seat belts .....................................7-5
Corrosion protection ...............................7-6
Most common factors contributing to vehicle
corrosion ......................................7-6
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion ......................................7-6
To protect your vehicle from corrosion ............7-6
Information Provided by:
In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-
hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
●after a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain.
●after driving on coastal roads.
●when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-
pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get
on the paint surface.
●when dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.
WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm
(never hot) water.
CAUTION
●Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, espe-
cially brushless ones, use some acid for
cleaning. The acid may react with some
plastic vehicle components, causing
them to crack. This could affect their
appearance, and also could cause them
not to function properly. Always check
with your car wash to confirm that acid
is not used.
●Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical deter-
gents, gasoline or solvents.
●Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-
light or while the vehicle body is hot, as
the surface may become water-spotted.
●Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
stances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
water.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to
avoid water spots.
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
proper product.
●Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-
ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the
wax.
●Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may
damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
CLEANING EXTERIOR
7-2 Appearance and care
Information Provided by:
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or
staining. Special cleaning products are available
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory
store.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-
derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-
riod and again in the spring, the underseal must
be checked and, if necessary, retreated.
GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to
become coated with a film after the vehicle is
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
cloth will easily remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows,
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
cleaners. They could damage the electrical
conductors, radio antenna elements or
rear window defroster elements.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-
ened in a mild soap solution, especially during
winter months in areas where road salt is used. If
not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
●Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.
●Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as am-
bient temperature.
●Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the
cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-
ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may
react with the coating and form a compound. This
compound may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
●Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-
ing on the tire dissolves more easily than
with an oil-based tire dressing.
●Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
●Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-
pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.
●Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.
Appearance and care 7-3
Information Provided by:
This vehicle has new and unique surfaces on the
center console and door pull finishers. If cleaning
is required use mild soap and water. However if
mild soap and water won’t clean the center con-
sole and door pull finishers, use NISSAN Vinyl
and Leather Cleaner (or equivalent).
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-
ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.
Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-
facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-
tectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean
the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can dam-
age the seat or occupant classification
sensor. This can also affect the operation
of the air bag system and result in serious
personal injury.
CAUTION
●Never use benzene, thinner, or any simi-
lar material on the interior surfaces or
surface damage may occur. Such dam-
age is not covered under the NISSAN
warranty.
●Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
damaging to leather surfaces and
should be removed promptly. Do not
use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents or ammonia-based cleaners as
they may damage the leather’s natural
finish.
●Never use fabric protectors unless rec-
ommended by the manufacturer.
●Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-
age the lens cover.
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect
the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,
take the following precautions:
●Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-
manent discoloration when they contact ve-
hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-
ener in a location that allows it to hang free
and not contact an interior surface.
●Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause imme-
diate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions before using the air fresheners.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference that
may result in a collision or injury:
●NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-
other floor mat in the driver front
position.
●Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats
specifically designed for use in your ve-
hicle model. See your NISSAN dealer
for more information.
●Properly position the mats in the floor-
well using the floor mat positioning aid.
See ⴖFloor mat positioning aidⴖin this
section.
CLEANING INTERIOR
7-4 Appearance and care
Information Provided by:
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-
tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
easier to clean the interior. Mats should be main-
tained with regular cleaning and replaced if they
become excessively worn.
Floor mat positioning aid
This vehicle includes two driver’s side front floor
mat brackets and two passenger’s side front floor
mat brackets to help keep your floor mats in
place. Genuine NISSAN floor mats have been
specially designed for your vehicle model. The
driver’s and passenger’s side floor mats have two
grommet holes incorporated in them. Position
each mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook
through the floor mat grommet holes while cen-
tering the mat in the floorwell.
Periodically check to make certain the mats are
properly positioned.
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”
in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-
tal restraint system” section of this manual.
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
since these materials may severely
weaken the seat belt webbing.
LAI2009
Appearance and care 7-5
Information Provided by:
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
●The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas.
●Damage to paint and other protective coat-
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic accidents.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-
hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside
the vehicle and should be removed for drying to
avoid floor panel corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing and where
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is
used.
Temperature
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-
sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-
ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-
erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
●Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
●Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
●Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
●Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.
CAUTION
●NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
bris from the passenger compartment
by washing it out with a hose. Remove
dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
●Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and corro-
sion, which may be required in some areas, con-
sult a NISSAN dealer.
CORROSION PROTECTION
7-6 Appearance and care
Information Provided by:
8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Maintenance requirements..........................8-2
General maintenance ..............................8-2
Explanation of general maintenance items .........8-2
Maintenance precautions ...........................8-5
Engine compartment check locations ................8-6
Engine cooling system .............................8-7
Checking engine coolant level ...................8-8
Changing engine coolant ........................8-8
Engine oil.........................................8-9
Checking engine oil level ........................8-9
Changing engine oil ...........................8-10
Changing engine oil filter .......................8-11
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid
(if so equipped) ..................................8-11
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid ..............8-12
Windshield-washer fluid...........................8-12
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir ...............8-12
Battery ..........................................8-13
Jump starting .................................8-15
Variable voltage control system.....................8-15
Drive belt ........................................8-16
Spark plugs......................................8-16
Replacing spark plugs .........................8-16
Air cleaner .......................................8-17
In-cabin microfilter.............................8-18
Windshield wiper blades ..........................8-18
Cleaning .....................................8-18
Replacing ....................................8-19
Brakes ..........................................8-21
Fuses ...........................................8-21
Engine compartment...........................8-22
Passenger compartment .......................8-23
Battery replacement ..............................8-25
Keyfob (if so equipped) ........................8-25
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) ........8-27
Lights ...........................................8-28
Headlights....................................8-28
Fog lights (if so equipped) ......................8-29
Exterior and interior lights.......................8-30
Wheels and tires .................................8-32
Tire pressure. . . ...............................8-32
Tire labeling...................................8-36
Types of tires..................................8-38
Tire chains....................................8-39
Changing wheels and tires .....................8-39
Information Provided by:
Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-
mum maintenance requirements with long ser-
vice intervals to save you both time and money;
however, some day-to-day and regular mainte-
nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s
good mechanical condition as well as its emis-
sions and engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper
maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-
nance chain.
Scheduled maintenance
For your convenience, both required and optional
scheduled maintenance items are described and
listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure
that necessary maintenance is performed on your
NISSAN at regular intervals.
General maintenance
General maintenance includes those items which
should be checked during normal day-to-day op-
eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-
eration. It is your responsibility to perform these
maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks requires
minimal mechanical skill and only a few general
automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by you,
a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a NISSAN
dealer.
Where to go for service
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems
checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
who are kept up-to-date with the latest service
information through technical bulletins, service
tips and in-dealership training programs. They
are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-
hicles before they work on your vehicle rather
than after they have worked on it.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
service department performs the best job to meet
the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —
in a reliable and economical way.
During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-
tions” in this section.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with“*”isfound in this section.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Doors and engine hood Check that the doors
and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure
that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,
latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.
Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the
hood from opening when the primary latch is
released.
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if
necessary.
Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every
5,000 miles (8,000 km).
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-
sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components Replace the TPMS
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel
alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
●For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-
aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair
facility.
Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or
wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when per-
forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-
hicle, etc.
Additional information on the following
items with an “*” is found in this section.
Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth
operation and make sure the pedal does not bind
or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away
from the pedal.
Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-
tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-
ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the
vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a
NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat
away from the pedal.
Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
P (Park) position mechanism On a fairly
steep hill, check that the vehicle is held securely
with the shift lever in the P (Park) position without
applying any brakes.
Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-
tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held
on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake
applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,
see a NISSAN dealer.
Seats Check seat position controls such as seat
adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they
operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in
every position. Check that the head
restraints/headrests move up and down
smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold
securely in all latched positions.
Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and are installed securely. Check the belt web-
bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
Information Provided by:
Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-
ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard
steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Windshield wiper and washer* Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly and that
the wipers do not streak.
Windshield defroster Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or
air conditioner (if so equipped).
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It
should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-
hicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic
accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (Phone
chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.) 2. Vehicle
is not driven regularly and/or only driven
short distances. In these cases, the battery
may need to be charged to maintain battery
health.
Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure that
the brake and clutch fluid level is between the
MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts
are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level* Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.
Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the oil pan.
Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the
carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,
water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
air conditioner (if so equipped) after use is nor-
mal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline
fumes are evident, check for the cause and have
it corrected immediately.
Radiator and hoses Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.
Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-
posed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances from the
underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor
pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the
end of winter, the underbody should be thor-
oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas
where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See
the “Appearance and care” section of this
manual.
Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there is
adequate fluid in the reservoir.
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
When performing any inspection or maintenance
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to
the vehicle. The following are general precau-
tions which should be closely observed.
WARNING
●Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-
ply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle
from moving. For manual transmission
models, move the shift lever to N (Neu-
tral). For CVT models, move the shift
lever to P (Park).
●Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
●If you must work with the engine run-
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans, belts
and any other moving parts.
●It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
such as rings, watches, etc. before
working on your vehicle.
●Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
●If you must run the engine in an en-
closed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
●Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is neces-
sary to work under the vehicle, support
it with safety stands.
●Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
●On gasoline engine models, the fuel
filter or fuel lines should be serviced by
a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines
are under high pressure even when the
engine is off.
●
Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic engine cooling fan. It may come on
at any time without warning, even if the
ignition key is in the OFF position and the
engine is not running. To avoid injury,
always disconnect the negative battery
cable before working near the fan.
CAUTION
●Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
●Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Al-
ways conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
●Never leave the engine or the CVT re-
lated component harness connector
disconnected while the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
●Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
gives instructions regarding only those items
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-
able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-
der information” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper
servicing may result in operating difficulties or
excessive emissions, and could affect warranty
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,
have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5
Information Provided by:
MRA8DE engine
1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
reservoir
3. Air cleaner
4. Battery
5. Fuse/fusible link box
6. Engine coolant reservoir
7. Radiator cap
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Drive belt location
10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
LDI2166
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and
50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze and
coolant protection. The antifreeze solution con-
tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional en-
gine cooling system additives are not necessary.
WARNING
●Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. See precautions in “If your
vehicle overheats” found in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual.
●The radiator is equipped with a pres-
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-
gine damage, use only a genuine
NISSAN radiator cap.
CAUTION
●Never use any cooling system additives
such as radiator sealer. Additives may
clog the cooling system and cause dam-
age to the engine, transmission and/or
cooling system.
●When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted
to provide antifreeze protection to -34°
F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection
is needed due to weather where you
operate your vehicle, add Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
(blue) concentrate following the direc-
tions on the container. If an equivalent
coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is
used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s
instructions to maintain minimum anti-
freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solutions
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
may damage the engine cooling
system.
●The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or
7 years. Mixing any other type of cool-
ant other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-
ing Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
of non-distilled water will reduce the
life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-
ant. Refer to the NISSAN Service and
Maintenance Guide for more details.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7
Information Provided by:
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
the MIN level 䊊
B, add coolant to the MAX level
䊊
A. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant
level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If
there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the
radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level 䊊
A.
This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of
the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles
(168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of
coolant or the use of non-distilled water will re-
duce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant.
Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide for more details.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.
The service procedure can be found in the
NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheat-
ing.
WARNING
●To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the en-
gine is hot.
●Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escaping
from the radiator.
●Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
●Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
dren and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
LDI2167
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than
10 minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-
insert it all the way.
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
level. It should be between the H (High) and
L (Low) marks 䊊
B. This is the normal oper-
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below
the L (Low) mark 䊊
A, remove the oil filler cap
and pour recommended oil through the
opening. Do not overfill 䊊
C.
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the severity
of operating conditions.
CAUTION
●Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insuffi-
cient amount of oil can damage the
engine, and such damage is not covered
by warranty.
●It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the se-
verity of operating conditions.
Make sure to follow the engine oil changing inter-
vals in the maintenance booklet. Operating under
the following conditions may require more fre-
quent oil change:
●repeated short distance driving
●driving in dusty conditions
●stop and go commuting.
LDI2168 LDI0371
ENGINE OIL
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9
Information Provided by:
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature, then turn it off.
3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊
Aby turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug
䊊
B.
5. Remove the drain plug 䊊
Bwith a wrench by
turning it counterclockwise and completely
drain the oil.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and
replace it at this time. See “Changing engine
oil filter” in this section.
WARNING
●Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
●Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
●Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
CAUTION
●Be careful not to burn yourself. The en-
gine oil may be hot.
●Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
●Check your local regulations.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with
a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil through
the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler
cap securely.
See “Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual for drain
and refill capacity.
The drain and refill capacity depends on the
oil temperature and drain time. Use these
specifications for reference only. Always use
the dipstick to determine when the proper
amount of oil is in the engine.
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around
the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-
quired.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level with the
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
LDI2190
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter 䊊
C.
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench
by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove
the oil filter by turning it by hand.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with
a clean rag.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket material
remaining on the sealing surface of the
engine. Failure to do so could lead to
engine damage.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
engine oil.
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance
is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.
8. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine
oil if necessary.
CAUTION
●Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
NS-3. Do not mix with other fluids.
●Using transmission fluid other than
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 will
damage the CVT, which is not covered
by the warranty.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is
required, we recommend your NISSAN dealer for
servicing.
LDI2275
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID (if so
equipped)
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11
Information Provided by:
For further brake and clutch fluid specification
information, refer to “Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of this
manual.
WARNING
●Use only new fluid from a sealed con-
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake and clutch
(if so equipped) systems. The use of
improper fluids can damage the brake
and clutch system and affect the vehi-
cle’s stopping ability.
●Clean the filler cap before removing.
●Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous and
should be stored carefully in marked
containers out of reach of children.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
spilled, immediately wash the surface with
water.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the level is
below the MIN line 䊊
1, or the brake warning light
comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line 䊊
2.If
fluid must be added frequently, the system should
be checked by a NISSAN dealer.
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-
cally.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift
the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-
washer fluid into the reservoir opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield-
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions for the mixture ratio.
LDI2169 LDI2170
BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped)
FLUID
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of
windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-
shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-
freeze or equivalent.
CAUTION
●Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for windshield-washer fluid.
This may result in damage to the paint.
●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concen-
trates at full strength. Some methyl al-
cohol based washer fluid concentrates
may permanently stain the grille if
spilled while filling the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir.
●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recom-
mended levels before pouring the fluid
into the windshield-washer fluid reser-
voir. Do not use the windshield-washer
reservoir to mix the washer fluid con-
centrate and water.
●Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking
soda and water.
●Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.
●If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery
terminal cable to prevent discharge.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic
accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (Phone char-
gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only
driven short distances. In these cases, the
battery may need to be charged to maintain
battery health.
WARNING
●Do not expose the battery to flames, an
electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen
gas generated by the battery is explo-
sive. Explosive gases can cause blind-
ness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or
painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can
cause blindness or injury. After touch-
ing a battery or battery cap, do not
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly
wash your hands. If the acid contacts
your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15 minutes
and seek medical attention.
●Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce battery
life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
●When working on or near a battery, al-
ways wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
●Battery posts, terminals and related ac-
cessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds. Wash hands after handling.
BATTERY
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13
Information Provided by:
●Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
●Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.
1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as
shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery
case.
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level up to the bottom of
the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall
the vent caps.
WDI0224
LDI0302
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”
in the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
●Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will by-
pass the variable voltage control sys-
tem and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
●Use electrical accessories with the en-
gine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage
control system. This system measures the
amount of electrical discharge from the battery
and controls voltage generated by the generator.
The current sensor 䊊
Ais located near the battery
along the negative battery cable. If you add elec-
trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to
ground them to a suitable body ground such as
the frame or engine block area.
LDI2178
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15
Information Provided by:
1. Automatic tensioner
2. Generator
3. Water pump
4. Air conditioner compressor
5. Crankshaft pully
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
LOCK position before servicing drive belt.
The engine could rotate unexpectedly.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in poor
condition, have it replaced or adjusted by a
NISSAN dealer.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-
tion.
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket
can damage the spark plugs.
WDI0638 SDI1895
DRIVE BELT SPARK PLUGS
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
Platinum-tipped spark plugs (except
California models)
It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped 䊊
A
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-
low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service
platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-
gapping.
●Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
dealer for assistance.
Iridium-tipped spark plugs (California
models only)
It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped 䊊
A
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-
low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-
ping.
●Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
dealer for assistance.
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-
nance Guide.”
To remove the air cleaner filter:
1. Unlatch the retaining clips 䊊
A.
2. Pull up at points 䊊
Band remove.
3. Pull up and remove air cleaner housing 䊊
C.
4. Remove the air cleaner filter, Wipe the inside
of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover
with a damp cloth, then replace air cleaner
filter.
NOTE:
After installing a new air cleaner, make
sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the
housing and latch the clips.
WARNING
●Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or oth-
ers to be burned. The air cleaner not
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed, and be careful when working
on the engine with the air cleaner
removed.
●Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result
in serious injury.
LDI2171
AIR CLEANER
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17
Information Provided by:
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-
borne dust and pollen particles and reduces
some objectionable outside odors. The filter is
located behind the trim panel near the accelera-
tor pedal. Refer to the “NISSAN Service and
Maintenance Guide” for change intervals.
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
dealer.
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer
fluid or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean
if beads do not form when rinsing with clear
water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked
in a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinse
the blades with clear water. If your windshield is
still not clear after cleaning the blades and using
the wiper, install new windshield wiper blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-
age the windshield and impair driver
vision.
Type A
LDI2348
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow
the procedure below:
1. When ignition switch is ON or within
60 seconds after placing the ignition switch
from ON to OFF position.
2. Quickly push the windshield wiper and
washer lever to the mist position twice 䊊
2
within 0.5 seconds. This action will cause
the wipers to take the service position auto-
matically.
3. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
Type B
LDI2396 LDI2194
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19
Information Provided by:
4. Push the release tab 䊊
4.
5. Move the wiper blade down 䊊
5and remove.
6. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it clicks into place.
7. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the
groove.
8. Finally, push the windshield wiper and
washer lever to the mist position 䊊
8. This
action will cause the wipers to resume the
set position.
CAUTION
●After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the
hood is opened.
●Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-
aged from wind pressure.
Type A
LDI2349
Type B
LDI2397
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front (and rear– if so equipped) disc-type
brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is
applied. The rear drum-type brakes (if so
equipped) self-adjust every time the parking
brake is applied.
WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system
check if the brake pedal height does not
return to normal.
Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-
placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-
ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-
sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the
function or performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For more information regarding
brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-
nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-
vice and Maintenance Guide”.
Two types of fuses are used. Type 䊊
Ais used in
the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type
䊊
Bis used in the passenger compartment fuse
box.
Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They
are stored in the passenger compartment fuse
box.
Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-
partment and passenger compartment fuse
boxes.
LDI0455
BRAKES FUSES
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21
Information Provided by:
If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,
the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse
pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not
affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the
fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.
Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-
hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the
underhood fuse boxes.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not come on,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the
tab 䊊
Aand lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller, which
is located in the center of the fuse block in
the passenger compartment.
LDI0457 LDI2172
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
5. If the fuse is open 䊊
A, replace it with a new
fuse 䊊
B.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,
replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The fuse box is located on the driver’s side
of the instrument panel.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Remove the fuse box cover with a suitable
tool. Use a cloth to avoid damaging the trim.
3. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller 䊊
2.
WDI0452 LDI2174
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23
Information Provided by:
5. If the fuse is open 䊊
A, replace it with an
equivalent good fuse 䊊
B.
6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
Extended storage switch
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
remove the extended storage switch and check
for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The extended storage switch is used for
long term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-
tended storage switch is broken it is not
necessary to replace it. Replace only the
open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.
How to replace the extended storage switch:
1. To remove the extended storage switch, be
sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
LOCK position.
2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF
position.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Pinch the locking tabs 䊊
1and 䊊
2found on
each side of the storage switch.
5. Pull the storage switch straight out from the
fuse box 䊊
3.
LDI0456 LDI2175
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow
the battery or removed parts.
KEYFOB (if so equipped)
Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:
1. Remove the screw 䊊
A.
2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the
corner 䊊
Band twist it to separate the upper
part from the lower part. Use a cloth to
protect the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
●Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-
tric terminals as doing so could cause a
malfunction.
●Make sure that the + side faces the bot-
tom of the case 䊊
C.
Recommended battery: CR1620 or equivalent.
4. Close the lid and install the screw securely.
5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.
See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for
replacement.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5.
●An improperly disposed battery can
hurt the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
●The keyfob is water-resistant; how-
ever, if it does get wet, immediately
wipe completely dry.
LDI2060
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25
Information Provided by:
●The operational range of the keyfob
extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)
from the vehicle. This range may vary
with conditions.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with RSS-210 of In-
dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, in-
cluding interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.
SDI1867
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-
lows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-
gent Key.
2. Insert a small screwdriver 䊊
Ainto the slit 䊊
B
of the corner and twist it to separate the
upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to
protect the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-
lent.
●Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-
tric terminals as doing so could cause a
malfunction.
●Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
●Make sure that the + side faces the bot-
tom of the case.
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated 䊊
C䊊
D.
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for
replacement.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with RSS-210 of In-
dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, in-
cluding interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.
WDI0535
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27
Information Provided by:
HEADLIGHTS
Replacing the halogen headlight bulb
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-
cause the headlight assembly must be removed
from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your
NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
●Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is
necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.
●Do not leave the headlight assembly
open without a bulb installed for a long
period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,
etc. entering the headlight body may
affect bulb performance. Remove the
bulb from the headlight assembly just
before a replacement bulb is installed.
●Only touch the base when handling the
bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.
Touching the glass could significantly
affect bulb life and/or headlight
performance.
●High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.
●Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not
a malfunction. If large drops of water collect
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.
LIGHTS
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
Replacing the fog light bulb
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the fasteners 䊊
A; carefully pull back
the front fender protector .
3. Rotate the bulb 䊊
Bcounterclockwise and
pull out to remove.
LDI2179
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29
Information Provided by:
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*
Headlight assembly*
Low 55 H11
High 65 H9
Turn 28 WY28/8W
Park — —
Side marker 3.8 194
Front fog light* (if so equipped) 55 H11
Front map lights* — —
Room light 8 AL19
Trunk light 3.4 158
High-mounted stop light*
Inside — —
Spoiler (if so equipped) — —
Rear combination light*
Turn signal light 21 WY21W
Stop/Tail — —
Backup (reversing) 16 W16W
Rear side marker — —
License plate light* 5 W5W
* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
LDI2173
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
1. Map light
2. Interior light
3. Door mirror turn signal light
4. Headlight assembly
5. Fog light (if so equipped)
6. High-mount stop light
7. Trunk light
8. License plate light
9. Rear combination light
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb replacement
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or
cover.
WDI0257
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31
Information Provided by:
Use a cloth 䊊
1to protect the interior light hous-
ing.
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the
“In case of emergency” section of this
manual.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It
monitors tire pressure of all tires except
the spare. When the low tire pressure
warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE
PRES warning is displayed in the odom-
eter, one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under-inflated.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-
tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example a flat tire while driving).
For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-
sure warning light”in the “Instruments and
controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In
case of emergency” section.
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including the
spare) often and always prior to long dis-
tance trips. The recommended tire pres-
sure specifications are shown on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label
or the Tire and Loading Information label
under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.
The Tire and Loading Information label is
affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire
pressures should be checked regularly
because:
●Most tires naturally lose air over time.
●Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
parking.
The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate
speeds.
Interior light
WDI0206
WHEELS AND TIRES
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
The “TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert” pro-
vides visual and audible signals outside
the vehicle for inflating tires to the recom-
mended COLD tire pressure. For more
information, see “TPMS with Easy Fill Tire
Alert” in the “Starting and driving” section.
Incorrect tire pressure, including un-
der inflation, may adversely affect
tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
●Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
●The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-
tion label. The vehicle weight ca-
pacity is indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do
not load your vehicle beyond this
capacity. Overloading your ve-
hicle may result in reduced tire
life, unsafe operating conditions
due to premature tire failure, or
unfavorable handling character-
istics and could also lead to a
serious accident. Loading beyond
the specified capacity may also
result in failure of other vehicle
components.
●Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge
to ensure that the tire pressures
are at the specified level.
●For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33
Information Provided by:
Tire and loading information label
䊊
1Seating capacity: The maximum num-
ber of occupants that can be seated
in the vehicle.
䊊
2Vehicle load limit: See “Vehicle load-
ing information” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section.
䊊
3Original tire size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
䊊
4Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The
recommended cold tire inflation is set
by the manufacturer to provide the
best balance of tire wear, vehicle
handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,
up to the vehicle’s GVWR.
䊊
5Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” in
this section.
䊊
6Spare tire size.
LDI2007
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press too
hard or force the valve stem side-
ways, or air will escape. If the hissing
sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard while checking the pressure,
reposition the gauge to eliminate this
leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare to the specifica-
tion shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of
the gauge stem to release pressure.
Recheck the pressure and add or
release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.
Grades: S, SV, SR,SL
Size Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Front Original Tire:
P205/50R17
P205/55R16
240 kPa, 35 PSI
Rear Original Tire:
P205/50R17
P205/55R16
240 kPa, 35 PSI
Grades: S, SV, SR,SL
Spare Tire:
T125/70D16 420 kPa, 60 PSI
Grades: FE + S, FE +SV
Size Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Front Original Tire:
P205/55R16 250 kPa, 36 PSI
Rear Original Tire:
P205/55R16 250 kPa, 36 PSI
Spare Tire:
T125/70D16 420 kPa, 60 PSI
LDI0393
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35
Information Provided by:
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information iden-
tifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also pro-
vides the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in case of a
recall.
䊊
1Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-
signed for passenger vehicles (not all
tires have this information).
2. Three-digit number (215): This num-
ber gives the width in millimeters of
the tire from sidewall edge to side-
wall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This number
is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight
each tire can support. You may not
find this information on all tires be-
cause it is not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
Example
WDI0394
Example
WDI0395
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
䊊
2TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-
ment Of Transportation”. The symbol
can be placed above, below or to the
left or right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-
ture.
6. Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For ex-
ample, the numbers 3103 means the
31st week of 2003. If these numbers
are missing then look on the other
sidewall of the tire.
䊊
3Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-
coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-
ers also must indicate the materials in the
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester
and others.
䊊
4Maximum permissible inflation pres-
sure
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible in-
flation pressure.
䊊
5Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum load
in kilograms and pounds that can be car-
ried by the tire. When replacing the tires
on the vehicle, always use a tire that has
the same load rating as the factory in-
stalled tire.
䊊
6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
Indicates whether the tire requires an in-
ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).
Example
WDI0396
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37
Information Provided by:
䊊
7The word “radial”
The word “radial” is shown if the tire has
radial structure.
䊊
8Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology
In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-
ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
●When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information about
tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
●Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory equipped
tires, and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
●For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-
els to provide good performance all year, includ-
ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow
traction than All Season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models
to provide superior performance on dry roads.
Summer tire performance is substantially re-
duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have
the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings
than factory equipped tires and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-
ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
four wheels.
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires
may be used. However, some U.S. states and
Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check
local, state and provincial laws before installing
studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of
studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION
Tire chains/cables should not be installed
on P205/50R17 size tires. Installation of
the tire chains/cables on P205/50R17 size
tires will cause damage to the vehicle. If
you plan to use tire chains/cables, you
should install P205/55R16 size tires on
your vehicle.
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to
location. Check the local laws before installing
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure
they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-
signed to meet the minimum clearances between
the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or
body component required to accommodate the
use of a winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are determined
using the factory equipped tires. Other types may
damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when
recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to
ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
must be secured or removed to prevent the pos-
sibility of whipping action damage to the fenders
or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive
at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may
be damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor-
mance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
chains in such conditions can cause damage to
the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress.
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-
gency” section of this manual for tire re-
placing procedures.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
WDI0258
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39
Information Provided by:
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tight-
ened to specifications at all times. It
is recommended that wheel nuts be
tightened to specification at each
tire rotation interval.
WARNING
●After rotating the tires, check and
adjust the tire pressure.
●Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
●Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
●For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
Tire wear and damage
WARNING
●Tires should be periodically in-
spected for wear, cracking, bulg-
ing or objects caught in the tread.
If excessive wear, cracks, bulging
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
should be replaced.
●The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
●Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be ob-
vious. Replace the tires as neces-
sary to prevent tire failure and
possible personal injury.
●Improper service of the spare tire
may result in serious personal in-
jury. If it is necessary to repair the
spare tire, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
●For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
WDI0259
8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. Recommended types and
sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
WARNING
●The use of tires other than those recom-
mended or the mixed use of tires of
different brands, construction (bias,
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns
can adversely affect the ride, braking,
handling, VDC system, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain
clearance, speedometer calibration,
headlight aim and bumper height.
Some of these effects may lead to acci-
dents and could result in serious per-
sonal injury.
●If your vehicle was originally equipped
with 4 tires that were the same size and
you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires,
install the new tires on the rear axle.
Placing new tires on the front axle may
cause loss of vehicle control in some
driving conditions and cause an acci-
dent and personal injury.
●If the wheels are changed for any rea-
son, always replace with wheels which
have the same off-set dimension.
Wheels of a different off-set could
cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-
hicle handling characteristics, affect the
VDC system and/or interference with
the brake discs/drums. Such interfer-
ence can lead to decreased braking ef-
ficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe
wear. Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual for wheel off-set
dimensions.
●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
●Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
●Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been re-
paired. Such wheels or tires could have
structural damage and could fail with-
out warning.
●The use of retread tires is not
recommended.
●For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get
out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-
anced as required.
Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
●For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
formation Booklet.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41
Information Provided by:
Care of wheels
●Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
to maintain their appearance.
●Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.
●Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the wheels.
●Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
●NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in areas
where it is used during winter.
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire)
Observe the following precautions if the TEM-
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or
involved in an accident:
WARNING
●The spare tire should be used for emer-
gency use only. It should be replaced
with the standard tire at the first oppor-
tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-
tial damage.
●Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
●Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).
●With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle at
speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).
●When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use
tire chains only on the front (original)
tires.
●Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate
than the standard tire. Replace the
spare tire as soon as the tread wear
indicators appear.
●Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
●Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
●Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
CAUTION
●Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause dam-
age to the vehicle.
●Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive
the vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.
8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
9 Technical and consumer information
Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . . .....9-2
Fuel recommendation ...........................9-4
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations ..........9-6
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations ..............................9-7
Specifications.....................................9-8
Engine ........................................9-8
Wheels and tires ...............................9-9
Dimensions and weights .......................9-10
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country ..................................9-11
Vehicle identification ..............................9-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate .........9-11
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) ..............................9-11
Engine serial number...........................9-12
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........9-12
Emission control information label ...............9-12
Tire and loading information label................9-13
Air conditioner specification label................9-13
Installing front license plate ........................9-14
Vehicle loading information ........................9-14
Terms ........................................9-14
Vehicle load capacity ..........................9-15
Loading tips . . . ...............................9-17
Measurement of weights .......................9-17
Towing a trailer ...................................9-18
Flat towing....................................9-18
Uniform tire quality grading ........................9-18
Emission control system warranty ..................9-19
Reporting safety defects ..........................9-20
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test .....9-21
Event Data Recorders (EDR).......................9-21
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-22
Information Provided by:
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
US measure Imp measure Liter
Fuel 13-1/4 gal 11 gal 50.0 See “Fuel recommendation” in this section.
Engine oil
• For further details, see “Engine oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
Drain and Refill
With oil filter change 4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt 4.0 • Engine oil with API Certification Mark.
• Viscosity SAE 0W-20.
• For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations”
in this section.
• As an alternative to this recommended oil, SAE 5W30 conven-
tional petroleum based oil may be used and meets all specifications
and requirements necessary to maintain the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Without oil filter
change 4 qt 3-3/8 qt 3.8
Cooling system
With reservoir
1-3/4 gal 1-1/2 gal 6.6 • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent.
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid ———•Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3.
•Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. Using transmis-
sion fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 will
damage the CVT, which is not covered by the NISSAN new
vehicle limited warranty.
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
9-2 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
US measure Imp measure Liter
Manual transmission gear oil ———•Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type
75W-80, or equivalent.
• If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type is
not available, API GL-4+, Viscosity SAE 75W-80 may be used as a
temporary replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type as soon as it is available.
• If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type is
not available, API GL-4+, Viscosity SAE 75W-80 may be used as a
temporary replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type as soon as it is available.
Brake and clutch fluid • Refill to the proper level according to the instruc-
tions in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
• See a NISSAN dealer for service.
• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid (Available in
mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer) or equivalent DOT 3.
Multi-purpose grease ———•NLGINo.2(LithiumSoap base).
Air conditioning system refrigerant ———•HFC-134a (R-134a).
• For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations” in this section.
Air conditioning system oil ———•Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent.
• For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations” in this section.
Windshield-washer fluid 1-1/4 gal 1 gal 4.5 • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & An-
tifreeze or equivalent.
Technical and consumer information 9-3
Information Provided by:
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
●Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system
or other damage can occur if E-85 is
used in vehicles that are not designed
to run on E-85.
●Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
●Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
●Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to
run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or
E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically
designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-
versely affect the emission control de-
vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-
age caused by such fuel is not covered
by the NISSAN new vehicle limited
warranty.
●U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-
fied by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbrevia-
tion or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-
cations where it is available. Many of the automo-
bile manufacturers developed this specification
to improve emission control system and vehicle
performance. Ask your service station manager if
the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-
lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN
supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-
gests that you use reformulated gasoline when
available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-
genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol
with or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of
which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-
patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-
termined. If in doubt, ask your service station
manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
the following precautions as the usage of such
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
and/or fuel system damage.
●The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
●If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should con-
tain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
●E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy-
genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect
the emission control devices and sys-
tems of the vehicle and should not be
used. Damage caused by such fuel is
not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle
limited warranty.
9-4 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
●If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corro-
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-
lated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not avail-
able to ensure that all methanol blends
are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-
hicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine stall-
ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after
using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-
eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can
cause paint damage.
E–15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel
ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can
only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15
fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. gov-
ernment regulations require fuel ethanol dispens-
ing pumps to be identified with small, square,
orange and black label with the common abbre-
viation or the appropriate percentage for that
region.
E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government
regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common abbreviation or
the appropriate percentage for that region.
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-
tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.
Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel
system and engine.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can cause
persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark
knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-
vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you
detect a persistent heavy spark knock even
when using gasoline of the stated octane
rating, or if you hear steady spark knock
while holding a steady speed on level
roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the
condition. Failure to correct the condition
is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN
is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-
countered, have your vehicle checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
Technical and consumer information 9-5
Information Provided by:
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory
engine life and performance. See “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in this
section. NISSAN recommends the use of an
energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel
economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-
cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-
tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which
do not have the specified quality label should not
be used as they could cause engine damage.
Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-
sary when the proper oil type is used and main-
tenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been
previously used should not be used.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-
ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil
viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-
placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals.”
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters
that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding
recommended oil and filter change intervals
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-
rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-
ranty.
LTI2051
9-6 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend
upon how you use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions may
require more frequent oil and filter changes:
●repeated short distance driving at cold out-
side temperatures
●driving in dusty conditions
●extensive idling
●towing a trailer
●stop and go commuting
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide” for the maintenance schedule.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle must be charged with the refriger-
ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C
system oil Type S or the exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will
cause severe damage to the air condition-
ing system and will require the replace-
ment of all air conditioner system
components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the
earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-
tions require the recovery and recycling of any
refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-
tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained
technicians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-
ant.
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air
conditioner system.
Technical and consumer information 9-7
Information Provided by:
ENGINE
Model MRA 8DE
Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline
Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.138 x 3.547 (79.7 x 90.1)
Displacement cu in (cm
3
) 109.71 (1,798)
Firing order 1–3–4–2
Idle speed
No adjustment is necessary.
M/T
CVT (in “N” position)
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO%atidle
Spark plug PLZKAR6A-11 (all except California models)
DILKAR6A-11 (California models)
Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Camshaft operation Timing chain
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
SPECIFICATIONS
9-8 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheel type Size Offset mm (in)
Aluminum
Steel
16x6.5J
17x6.5J
16 x 6.5JJ
45 (1.77)
45 (1.77)
45 (1.77)
Tire size P205/55R16
P205/50R17
Spare tire T125/70D16
Technical and consumer information 9-9
Information Provided by:
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Unit: mm (in)
Model
Overall length 4,625 (182.1)
SR 4,635 (182.5)
Overall width 1,760 (69.3)
Overall height 1,495 (58.9)
Front Track 1,530 (60.2)
Rear Track 1,530 (60.2)
Wheelbase 2,700 (106.3)
Gross vehicle weight rating kg (lb)
See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on the center pillar
between the driver’s side front and rear doors.
Gross axle weight rating
Front kg (lb)
Rear kg (lb)
9-10 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-
hicle in another country, you should first find
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-
cle’s engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-
fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where
appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-
sion control and safety standards vary according
to the country, state, province or district; there-
fore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into an-
other country, state, province or district and
registered, its modifications, transporta-
tion and registration are the responsibility
of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for
any inconvenience that may result.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is
attached as shown. This number is the identifica-
tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
registration.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)
The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.
LTI2050 STI0465
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER
COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
Technical and consumer information 9-11
Information Provided by:
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-
bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-
able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle
Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review
it carefully.
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The emission control information label is at-
tached to the underside of the hood as shown.
LDI2189 WTI0058 WTI0189
9-12 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. The label is located as
shown.
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is affixed to
the underside of the hood as shown.
LTI0084 LTI2048
Technical and consumer information 9-13
Information Provided by:
Use the following steps to mount the front license
plate:
䊊
1Make holes on the plastic finisher at the
location mark (small dimple) using a 0.20 in
(5 mm) drill. Apply light pressure to the drill.
Install the license plate holder using the two
screws provided with the holder.
䊊
2Mount the license plate using two M6-
14mm bolts.
WARNING
●It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In
a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
●Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat
belts.
●Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with
the following terms before loading your
vehicle:
●Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment, flu-
ids, emergency tools, and spare tire
assembly. This weight does not in-
clude passengers and cargo.
LTI2078
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
9-14 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
●GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
●GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-
sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional
equipment. This information is lo-
cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
●GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This informa-
tion is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
●GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total weight
rating of the vehicle, passengers,
cargo, and trailer.
●Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the ve-
hicle. This is the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo that
can be loaded into the vehicle. If the
vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be in-
cluded as part of the cargo load. This
information is located on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
●Cargo capacity - permissible weight
of cargo, the subtracted weight of
occupants from the load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-
hicle shown as “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do not exceed
the number of occupants shown as
“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-
ing Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo”, add the weight of all
occupants, then add the total luggage
weight. Examples are shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
Technical and consumer information 9-15
Information Provided by:
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX
kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX lbs
or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)
Example
WTI0169
9-16 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this re-
duces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
See “Measurement of weights” in this
section.
Also check tires for proper inflation pres-
sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label.
LOADING TIPS
●The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
●Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.
WARNING
●Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seat-
backs. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
●Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear GAWRs.
If you do, parts of your vehicle can
break, tire damage could occur,
or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could result
in loss of control and cause per-
sonal injury.
●Overloading not only can shorten
the life of your vehicle and the
tire, but can also cause unsafe
vehicle handling and longer brak-
ing distances. This may cause a
premature tire failure which
could result in a serious accident
and personal injury. Failures
caused by overloading are not
covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine axle
loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-
ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-
ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads
should not exceed the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are
given on the vehicle certification label. If
weight ratings are exceeded, move or re-
move items to bring all weights below the
ratings.
Technical and consumer information 9-17
Information Provided by:
Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.
FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle
behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor
home.
CAUTION
●Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
●Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-
ways tow forward, never backward.
●DO NOT tow any continuously variable
transmission vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground (flat towing). Do-
ing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis-
sion parts due to lack of transmission
lubrication.
●For emergency towing procedures refer
to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”
in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
Manual Transmission (if so equipped)
●Always tow with the manual transmission in
Neutral.
●After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and
idle the engine with the transmission in Neu-
tral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine
after every 500 miles (805 km) of towing
may cause damage to internal transmission
parts.
Continuously Variable Transmission (if
so equipped)
To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously
variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle
dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s
drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufac-
turer’s recommendations when using their prod-
uct.
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-
sured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
TOWING A TRAILER UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
9-18 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es-
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-
ther separately or in combination, can
cause heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following
emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-
ment by writing to:
●Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-
ment by writing to:
●Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
Technical and consumer information 9-19
Information Provided by:
For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a de-
fect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immedi-
ately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-
come involved in individual problems be-
tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-
hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a de-
fect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immedi-
ately inform Transport Canada in addition
to notifying NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may request that NISSAN con-
duct a recall campaign. However, Trans-
port Canada cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or NISSAN.
You may contact Transport Canada’s De-
fect Investigations and Recalls Division
toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may
also report safety defects online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/
7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng
(English speakers) or
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/
7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra
(French speakers)
Additional information concerning motor
vehicle safety may be obtained from Trans-
port Canada’s Road Safety Information
Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak-
ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere
(French speakers).
To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns
please contact our Consumer Information
Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
9-20 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
Due to legal requirements in some states and
Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-
quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-
tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of
the emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it
is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,
the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary
usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be
reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the
I/M test, check the vehicle’s
inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-
tion. Place the ignition switch in the ON position
without starting the engine. If the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 sec-
onds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blink
after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is
“ready”. Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the
“ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle for
testing.
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR
is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
●How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
●Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
●How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
●How fast the vehicle was traveling.
●Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by
your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-
facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have ac-
cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only
be accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-
mitted by law.
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
Technical and consumer information 9-21
Information Provided by:
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model
year and prior can be purchased. A genuine
NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of
service and repair information for your vehicle.
This manual is the same one used by the factory-
trained technicians working at NISSAN dealer-
ships. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can
also be purchased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
1-800-450-9491
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-
vice Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model
year and prior, please contact your nearest
NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and loca-
tion of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the
NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122
and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist
you.
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
9-22 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
10 Index
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)........5-30
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system).....................1-36
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact
air bag system) ...............1-44
Side and curtain (See supplemental
side air bag and curtain side-impact
air bag system) ...............1-49
Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-51, 2-17
Air cleaner housing filter ............8-17
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation ..........4-19
Air conditioner service ...........4-27
Air conditioner specification label .....9-13
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations .............9-7
Heater and air conditioner
controls................4-16,4-25
Servicing air conditioner ..........4-27
Airflowcharts..................4-20
Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) .........2-21
Anchor point locations .............1-22
Antenna.....................4-66
Anti-lock brake warning light..........2-13
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)........5-30
Armrests .....................1-4
Audible reminders ...............2-20
Audio system ..................4-27
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . .4-61, 4-62
Compact disc (CD) player . .4-39, 4-44, 4-50
FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player....................4-36
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player.................4-42,4-48
Audio System
iPod®Player.............4-56,4-58
Audio system
Radio ....................4-27
Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-65
USB interface ............4-52,4-54
Autolight switch.................2-27
Automatic
Automatic power window switch .....2-41
Transmission shift selector lock release . .5-18
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror .......3-30
Automatic door locks ..............3-6
AUXjack..............4-40,4-45,4-52
B
Battery......................8-13
Charge warning light ............2-14
Before starting the engine ...........5-13
Belt (See drive belt) ..............8-16
Block heater
Engine ....................5-35
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61, 4-62
Bluetooth® hands-free phone
system ...............4-68,4-83,4-93
Boosterseats..................1-33
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)......5-30
Brakefluid..................8-12
Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-30
Brake system ................5-30
Brake warning light .............2-13
Brake wear indicators ........2-20,8-21
Parking brake operation ..........5-21
Self-adjusting brakes ............8-21
Brakes ......................8-21
Break-inschedule ...............5-25
Brightness/contrast button ...........4-9
Brightness control
Instrument panel ..............2-29
Bulb check/instrument panel..........2-13
Bulbreplacement................8-30
C
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants...................9-2
Cargonet....................2-39
Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-14
Car phone or CB radio .............4-67
CD care and cleaning .............4-64
CD player (See audio system) . .4-39, 4-44, 4-50
Child restraints. . . . . . .1-16, 1-17, 1-18, 1-20
Precautions on child
restraints ........
1
-18, 1-24, 1-29, 1-33
Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-22
Child safety rear door lock............3-6
Information Provided by:
Chimes, audible reminders ...........2-20
Cleaning exterior and interior ...........7-2
Clock.......................4-38
(models without navigation system) ....4-38
Clockset.....................4-38
C.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........9-12
Cold weather driving...............5-33
Compact disc (CD) player . . . .4-39, 4-44, 4-50
Consolebox...................2-37
Consolelight...................2-45
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . .5-16
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid ..................8-11
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) .............5-16
Transmission shift selector lock release . .5-18
Control panel buttons ...............4-4
Brightness/contrast button ..........4-9
Enterbutton..................4-4
Setting button .................4-7
Controls
Audio controls (steering wheel). . . . . . .4-65
Heater and air conditioner
controls ................4-16,4-25
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants .................9-2
Changing engine coolant ...........8-8
Checking engine coolant level ........8-8
Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-6
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Cruisecontrol..................5-24
Cupholders................2-36,2-37
Curtain side-impact air bag system
(See supplemental side air bag and curtain
side-impact air bag system)...........1-49
D
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-28
Defroster switch
Rear window defroster switch .......2-25
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Dimmer switch for instrument panel ......2-29
Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-4
Door locks .....................3-4
Door open warning light.............2-14
Drive belt .....................8-16
Driving
Cold weather driving.............5-33
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) .............5-16
Driving with manual transmission ......5-19
Precautions when starting and driving ....5-2
E
Economy - fuel ..................5-27
Emission control information label .......9-12
Emission control system warranty .......9-19
Engine
Before starting the engine..........5-13
Block heater .................5-35
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants .................9-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Changing engine oil filter ..........8-11
Checking engine coolant level ........8-8
Checking engine oil level ...........8-9
Engine compartment check locations ....8-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-6
Engine cooling system ............8-7
Engine oil ...................8-9
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-6
Engine oil pressure warning light ......2-14
Engine oil viscosity ..............9-6
Engine serial number ............9-12
Engine specifications .............9-8
Starting the engine ..........5-14,5-15
Enterbutton....................4-4
Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
E
x
haust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . .5-2
Extended storage switch ............8-24
Eyeglass case ..................2-35
F
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . .6-2
Flat tire .......................6-3
Floor mat positioning aid .............7-5
Fluid
Brake fluid ..................8-12
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants .................9-2
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid ..................8-11
Engine coolant.................8-7
Engine oil ...................8-9
F.M.V.S.S. certification label...........9-12
Foglightswitch.................2-29
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system) ......1-44
Front seats .....................1-2
10-2
Information Provided by:
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants .................9-2
Fuel economy ................5-27
Fuel-filler door and cap ...........3-25
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ......3-25
Fuel gauge ...................2-6
Fueloctanerating...............9-5
Fuel recommendation .............9-4
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . .2-4, 3-25
Fuses.......................8-21
Fusiblelinks...................8-23
G
Gascap .....................3-25
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-6
Fuel gauge ...................2-6
Odometer ...................2-4
Speedometer .................2-3
Tachometer ..................2-5
Trip computer .................2-7
Trip odometer .................2-4
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Glovebox.....................2-37
Gloveboxlock..................2-37
H
Hands-free phone system,
Bluetooth®. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-68, 4-83, 4-93
Hazard warning flasher switch ..........6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-26
Headlight control switch ............2-26
Headlights ....................8-28
Head restraints ..................1-5
Heated seats ...................2-30
Heater
Heater and air conditioner
controls................4-16,4-25
Heater operation ...........4-18,4-26
Hood release...................3-23
Horn .......................2-30
I
Ignition switch ...................5-8
Ignition Switch
Push-Button Ignition Switch ........5-10
Immobilizer system . . . . . .2-23, 3-4, 5-10, 5-13
Important vehicle information label .......9-12
In-cabin microfilter ................8-18
Increasing fuel economy.............5-27
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders)....................2-12
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror ........3-30
Inside mirror ...................3-29
Instrument brightness control ..........2-29
Instrument panel ...............0-6,2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch ........2-29
Intelligent Key system
Key operating range .............3-12
Key operation ................3-13
Mechanicalkey................3-3
Remote keyless entry operation.......3-16
Troubleshooting guide ............3-22
Warning signals ...............3-22
Interiorlight................2-44,2-45
Interior trunk lid release .............3-24
iPod® Player ...............4-56,4-58
ISOFIX child restraints .............1-20
J
Jump starting ...................6-8
K
Key.........................3-2
Keyfob battery replacement ...........8-25
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system).........3-16
Keys, For Intelligent Key system ........3-10
L
Labels
Air conditioner specification label .....9-13
C.M.V.S.S. certification label ........9-12
Emission control information label .....9-12
Engine serial number ............9-12
F.M.V.S.S. certification label.........9-12
Tire and Loading Information label .....9-13
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. .9-11
Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-51
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
System ......................1-20
Light
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-51, 2-17
10-3
Information Provided by:
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-30
Bulb check/instrument panel ........2-13
Bulb replacement ..............8-30
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Console light .................2-45
Foglightswitch...............2-29
Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-26
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Headlights..................8-28
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44, 2-45
Lightbulbs..................8-28
Low tire pressure warning light .......2-14
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light......................2-16
Passenger air bag and status light .....1-45
Security indicator light............2-19
Spotlights (See map light) .........2-46
Trunklight ..................2-46
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders...................2-12
Lights
Maplights ..................2-46
Lock
Child safety rear door lock ..........3-6
Door locks ...................3-4
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ......3-25
Gloveboxlock................2-37
Power door locks ...............3-5
Trunk lid lock opener lever..........3-24
Loose fuel cap warning ..........2-4,3-25
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Low tire pressure warning light .........2-14
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-16
Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-14
M
Maintenance
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Insidethevehicle...............8-3
Maintenance precautions ...........8-5
Outside the vehicle ..............8-2
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4
Malfunction indicator light ............2-18
Manual front seat adjustment...........1-2
Maplights ....................2-46
Map pocket....................2-33
Meters and gauges ................2-3
Instrument brightness control ........2-29
Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror......3-30
Inside mirror .................3-29
Outside mirror control ............3-30
Outside mirrors ...............3-30
Vanity mirror .................3-29
Moonroof .....................2-42
N
NISSAN Intelligent Key® .............3-2
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system.............2-23,3-4,5-10,5-13
NISSAN voice recognition system ......4-101
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating)......9-5
Odometer .....................2-4
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants .................9-2
Changing engine oil .............8-10
Changing engine oil filter ..........8-11
Checking engine oil level ...........8-9
Engine oil ...................8-9
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-6
Engine oil viscosity ..............9-6
One shot call . . . . . . . .4-72, 4-86, 4-95, 4-96
Outside mirror control ..............3-30
Outside mirrors .................3-30
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats...........6-10
Owner’s manual order form ...........9-22
Owner’s manual/service manual order
information ....................9-22
P
Pandora audio ..................4-63
Parking
Parking brake operation ...........5-21
Parking/parking on hills ...........5-28
Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free
system ...............4-68,4-83,4-93
Power
Power door locks ...............3-5
Power outlet .................2-32
Power rear windows .............2-41
Power steering system ...........5-29
Power windows ...............2-39
Rear power windows ............2-41
Precautions
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
10-4
Information Provided by:
Precautions on child
restraints. . . . . . . . .1-18, 1-24, 1-29, 1-33
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . .1-9
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system....................1-36
Precautions when starting and driving ....5-2
Programmable features ..............4-7
Push starting ...................6-10
R
Radio
Car phone or CB radio ...........4-67
FM-AM radio with compact disc
(CD) player ..................4-36
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player .................4-42,4-48
Steering wheel audio control switch ....4-65
Readiness for inspection maintenance
(I/M) test .....................9-21
Rear power windows ..............2-41
Rearseat......................1-4
RearViewMonitor................4-10
Rear window defroster switch .........2-25
Recorders
Eventdata..................9-21
Refrigerant recommendation ...........9-7
Registering your vehicle in another country . .9-11
Reporting safety defects (US only) .......9-20
S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock ..........3-6
Child seat belts . . . . .1-18, 1-24, 1-29, 1-33
Reporting safety defects (US only) .....9-20
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2
Rear seat adjustment .............1-4
Seatback pockets ................2-34
Seat belt
Child safety..................1-16
Infants and small children ..........1-17
Injured Person ................1-12
Largerchildren................1-17
Precautions on seat belt usage........1-9
Pregnant women...............1-12
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Seatbelts...................1-9
Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-15
Three-point type with retractor .......1-12
Seat belt warning light..............2-17
Seats
Adjustment...................1-2
Frontseats...................1-2
Heatedseats.................2-30
Manual front seat adjustment.........1-2
Rearseat....................1-4
Security indicator light..............2-19
Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system), engine start . . . . .2-23, 3-4, 5-10, 5-13
Self-adjusting brakes ..............8-21
Service manual order form ...........9-22
Servicing air conditioner.............4-27
Setting button ...................4-7
Shifting
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) .....................5-17
Manual transmission .............5-20
Shiftlockrelease.................5-18
Shoulder belt height adjustment ........1-15
Side air bag system (See supplemental
side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag
system) ......................1-49
Spark plug replacement .............8-16
Speedometer ...................2-3
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
SRSwarninglabel................1-51
Starting
Before starting the engine..........5-13
Jump starting .................6-8
Precautions when starting and driving ....5-2
Push starting .................6-10
Starting the engine ..........5-14,5-15
Steering
Power steering system ...........5-29
Steering wheel audio control switch ......4-65
Stoplight.....................8-30
Storage......................2-33
Storage tray ...................2-33
Sunglasses case.................2-35
Sunglasses holder ................2-35
Sunroof (see Moonroof) .............2-42
Sun visors ....................3-28
Supplemental air bag warning labels ......1-51
Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-51, 2-17
Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-44
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels .......1-51
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system ....................1-36
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system) .........1-36
Supplemental side and curtain side-impact
air bag system ..................1-49
10-5
Information Provided by:
Switch
Autolightswitch...............2-27
Automatic power window switch ......2-41
Foglightswitch...............2-29
Hazard warning flasher switch ........6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-26
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Ignition switch .................5-8
Power door lock switch ............3-5
Rear window defroster switch .......2-25
Turnsignalswitch..............2-29
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
switch.....................2-31
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-24
T
Tachometer ....................2-5
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-6
Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),
engine start . . . . . . . . . .2-23, 3-4, 5-10, 5-13
Three-way catalyst ................5-2
Tire
Flat tire .....................6-3
Spare tire ................6-5,8-42
Tire and Loading Information label .....9-13
Tire chains ..................8-39
Tireplacard..................9-13
Tirepressure.................8-32
Tire rotation..................8-39
Types of tires .................8-38
Uniform tire quality grading .........9-18
Wheels and tires...............8-32
Wheel/tire size.................9-9
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light .......2-14
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....5-3
Towing
Flattowing..................9-18
Towtrucktowing...............6-11
Trailer towing .................9-18
Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid......................8-11
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) .............5-16
Driving with manual transmission ......5-19
Shift selector lock release. . . . . . . . . .5-18
Travel (See registering your vehicle in another
country)......................9-11
Trip computer ...................2-7
Trip odometer ...................2-4
Trunk lid lock opener lever............3-24
Trunklight ....................2-46
Turn signal switch ................2-29
U
Uniform tire quality grading ...........9-18
USB interface
Audio file operation ..........4-53,4-55
V
Vanity mirror ...................3-29
Variable voltage control system .........8-16
Vehicle dimensions and weights ........9-10
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-31
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system.....5-32
Vehicle identification...............9-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) ................9-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate....9-11
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Vehicle recovery .................6-14
Vehicle security system .............2-21
Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle immobi-
lizer system), engine start . .2-23, 3-4, 5-10, 5-13
Ventilators ....................4-16
Visors.......................3-28
Voice Prompt Interrupt . . .4-72, 4-86, 4-95, 4-96
Voice recognition system ...........4-101
W
Warning
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-51, 2-17
Anti-lock brake warning light ........2-13
Battery charge warning light ........2-14
Brake warning light .............2-13
Door open warning light...........2-14
Engine oil pressure warning light ......2-14
Hazard warning flasher switch ........6-2
Low fuel warning light ............2-14
Low tire pressure warning light .......2-14
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light......................2-16
Passenger air bag and status light .....1-45
Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Vehicle security system ...........2-21
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders...................2-12
Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-51
10-6
Information Provided by:
Warninglights..................2-12
Washer switch
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-24
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-10
Wheels and tires.................8-32
Wheel/tire size...................9-9
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country .................9-11
Windows
Locking passengers’ windows .......2-41
Power rear windows .............2-41
Power windows ...............2-39
Rear power windows ............2-41
Windshield-washer fluid.............8-12
Windshield wiper and washer switch .....2-24
Wiper
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-24
Wiper blades.................8-18
10-7
Information Provided by:
RECOMMENDED FUEL:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
●Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
●Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
●Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to
run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or
E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically
designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-
versely affect the emission control de-
vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-
age caused by such fuel is not covered
by the NISSAN new vehicle limited
warranty.
●U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-
fied by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbrevia-
tion or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
For additional information, see “Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section.
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:
●Engine oil with API Certification Mark
●Viscosity SAE 0W-20
See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in
the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
See Tire and Loading Information label.
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional
information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 mi (2,000 km) of vehicle
use, follow the recommendations outlined in the
“Break-in schedule” information found in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fol-
low these recommendations for the future reli-
ability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure
to follow these recommendations may result in
vehicle damage or shortened engine life.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Information Provided by:
B17-D
Printing : February 2014 (3)
Publication No.: OM2E 0B16U3
Printed in U.S.A.
OM14E 0B17U1
Information Provided by:
